2008 Accord Coupe
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Accord was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
０７／０８／０６ １２：０６：３３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０００２
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Event Data Recorders
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Introduction
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component.
WARNING:
ii
０７／０８／０６ １２：０６：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０００３
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
These signal words mean:
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Instructions
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
０７／０８／０６ １２：０６：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０００４
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
2008 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ...................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .......................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ......................................... 53
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink and other convenience items)... 121
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ............................................................................ 247
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ...................................................................................................... 267
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)...................................................... 295
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ..................................... 347
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ................................................ 373
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ......... 391
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ........................................................................................... 395
Index ............................................................................................................................... ...................................... I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
1
00X31-TE0-6000
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
Overview of Contents
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Features
Before Driving
Driving
Maintenance
Technical Information
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Index
Service Information Summary
Taking Care of the Unexpected
2
０７／０８／０６ １２：０７：１７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０００７
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
If equipped
:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
MIRROR CONTROLS
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.9, 23)
(P.9, 23)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
(P.63)
TRUNK RELEASE
LEVER
U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system is shown.
MOONROOF SWITCH
CLOCK
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.108) (P.213)
(P.201)
(P.122)
(P.127)
(P.135)
(P.199)(P.114)
(P.249)
(P.90)
(P.55)
(P.102)
(P.80)
(P.104)
(P.252)
GAUGES
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
LEVER
COMPASS
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P.270)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.273)
(P.206)
HOMELINK
BUTTONS
０７／０８／０６ １２：０７：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０００８
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
3:
1:
2:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
INTERFACE DIAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.73) (P.69)
(P.30)
(P.161)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.74)
(P.75)
(P.101)
(P.210)
(P.70, 73)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.198)
(P.283)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
(P.76)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS
(P.218)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS/
FOG LIGHTS
HORN
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH
2
3
3
3
2
1
０７／０８／０６ １２：０７：３４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０００９
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 13
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 15
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15
...Additional Safety Precautions . 16
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 17
..Seat Belt System Components . 17
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 18
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 19
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 21
......Airbag System Components . 21
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 28
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 30
.............................Airbag Service . 31
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 33
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 33
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 34
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 34
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 36
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 36
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 38
.......................Protecting Infants . 38
.........Protecting Small Children . 39
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40
....................Installing a Child Seat . 41
...............................With LATCH . 42
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44
..............................With a Tether . 46
...........Protecting Larger Children . 47
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 47
..................Using a Booster Seat . 48
When Can a Larger Child Sit
....................................in Front . 49
...Additional Safety Precautions . 50
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51
...................................Safety Labels . 52
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
０７／０８／０６ １２：０７：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１０
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
14
33
50
297
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Control Your Speed
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Restrain All Children
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
6
０７／０８／０６ １２：０７：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(2)
(2)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(9)
(1)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(3)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
０７／０８／０６ １２：０７：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
Why Wear Seat Belts
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
０７／０８／０６ １２：０８：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side or front impact (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
23 28
27
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
０７／０８／０６ １２：０８：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags off er no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
10
０７／０８／０６ １２：０８：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
CONTINUED
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
and trunk open monitor system
works.
Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page .Your vehicle has a door and
trunk open indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed.
80
61
81
33 50
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Adjust the Front Seats
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
０７／０８／０６ １２：０８：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust a
front seat (power adjustment) and
page for a manual adjustment.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).
93
92
76
On manual adjustable seats
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
12
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
０７／０８／０６ １２：０８：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
manual adjustable seat-back, and
page for the power adjustable
seat-back.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
96
93
92
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
０７／０８／０６ １２：０８：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
This spreads the force of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
17
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
14
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
０７／０８／０６ １２：０８：５４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００１９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
Advice for Pregnant Women6.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
０７／０８／０６ １２：０９：０２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Additional Safety Precautions
16
０７／０８／０６ １２：０９：０９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
25 26
Seat Belt System Components
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
０７／０８／０６ １２：０９：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
14
44
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt
18
０７／０８／０６ １２：０９：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
330
Honda
Warranty Information
do not deploy
CONTINUED
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
０７／０８／０６ １２：０９：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
20
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
０７／０８／０６ １２：０９：３９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
(3)
(5)
(4)
(12)
(6)
(8)
(8)
(1)
(9)
(2)
(11)
(5)
(13)
(14)
(10)
(4)
(15)
(16)
(16)
(7)
(7)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) SRS Indicator
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(15) Safing Sensor
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
０７／０８／０６ １７：５４：１０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
Your airbag system includes:
26
29
19
27
17
25
23
27
28
Additional Information About Your Airbags
22
０７／０８／０６ １２：０９：５７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
29
30
26
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
０７／０８／０６ １２：１０：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
24
０７／０８／０６ １２：１０：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００２９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced AirbagsDual-Threshold Airbags
latched
not latched
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：１０：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
330
30
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
26
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：１０：３２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
How Your Side Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
０７／０８／０６ １２：１０：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
One or both side curtain airbags may
inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
29
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
28
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
０７／０８／０６ １２：１０：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags
or seat belt tensioners.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’tcome
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
57
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator
Works
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
U.S. Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１０：５９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
30
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S.
Canada
０７／０８／０６ １７：５４：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during a crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
CONTINUED
Additional Safety PrecautionsAirbag Service
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
０７／０８／０６ １２：１１：１７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
32
０７／０８／０６ １２：１１：２０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
38 46
47 50
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１１：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
25
47
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
34
０７／０８／０６ １２：１１：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００３９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS
０７／０８／０６ １２：１１：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
15
14
47
92
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Protecting Children General Guidelines
36
０７／０８／０６ １２：１１：５７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature(seepage ).
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
44 45
91
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Lock both doors and the trunk
when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
０７／０８／０６ １２：１２：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a
rear-f acing child seat in the front
seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
38
０７／０８／０６ １２：１２：１４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
CONTINUED
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１２：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
25
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Saf ety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
1.
2.
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
40
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１２：３２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
０７／０８／０６ １２：１２：４１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
42
Rigid type
LOWER ANCHORS
BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：１２：５０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
4.
5.
6.
7.
96
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
Flexible type
ANCHOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：１２：５７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. 2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
44
０７／０８／０６ １２：１３：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００４９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
5.4.
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
０７／０８／０６ １２：１３：１０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Lift the cover, then attach the
tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
1.
2.
3.
44
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Installing a Child Seat
Using an Anchor
46
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
Center Position
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
ANCHOR
Outer Position
０７／０８／０６ １２：１３：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１３：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
3.
4.
5.
40
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
48
０７／０８／０６ １２：１３：３３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
14 47
CONTINUED
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
０７／０８／０６ １２：１３：４２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
50
０７／０８／０６ １２：１３：５１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows and
set the heating and cooling system/
climate control system as shown
below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１４：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models only
Canadian models
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models
U.S. models
Canadian models
Safety Labels
52
DASHBOARD
DOORJAMBS
SUN VISORS
RADIATOR CAP
HOOD
０７／０８／０６ １２：１４：２２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 54
..............................Instument Panel . 55
...........Instument Panel Indicators . 56
.............................................Gauges . 63
....................Information Display . 64
.....................................Odometer . 64
...................................Trip Meter . 65
..................................Fuel Gauge . 65
...................Temperature Gauge . 65
Outside Temperature
...................................Indicator . 66
..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 67
..................Maintenance Minder . 67
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 68
.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 69
.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 70
........................................Fog Lights . 73
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 73
.................Hazard Warning Button . 74
.................Rear Window Defogger . 75
........Steering Wheel Adjustments . 76
...............................Keys and Locks . 77
........................Immobilizer System . 78
................................Ignition Switch . 79
......................................Door Locks . 80
.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 81
.......................Remote Transmitter . 87
................................................Trunk . 90
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 91
.................................................Seats . 92
Driver’s Seat Power
............................Adjustments . 92
FrontSeatManual
............................Adjustments . 93
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
..............................Adjustment . 94
........................................Armrest . 94
........................Rear Seat Access . 94
..........................Head Restraints . 96
.......................Folding Rear Seat . 99
..................................Seat Heaters . 101
...........................................Mirrors . 102
............................Power Windows . 104
.......................................Moonroof . 108
...............................Parking Brake . 110
.........Interior Convenience Items . 111
..................................Glove Box . 112
.....................Beverage Holders . 112
.............Console Compartment . 113
........Accessory Power Sockets . 114
...................................Sun Visor . 115
............................Vanity Mirror . 115
....................Sunglasses Holder . 115
..................................Coat Hook . 116
...........................Center Pocket . 116
...............................Interior Lights . 117
..............................Ceiling Light . 117
...................................Spotlights . 117
........................Courtesy Lights . 118
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
53
０７／０８／０６ １２：１４：２７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５８
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
If equipped
:
Control Locations
54
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
MIRROR CONTROLS
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
(P.63)
TRUNK RELEASE
LEVER
MOONROOF SWITCH
CLOCK
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.108) (P.213)
(P.201)
(P.122)
(P.127)
(P.135)
(P.270)
(P.273)
(P.199)(P.114)
(P.249)
(P.90)
(P.55)
(P.102)
(P.80)
(P.104)
(P.252)
GAUGES
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
LEVER
COMPASS
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P.206)
HOMELINK
BUTTONS
U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system (A/T) is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１４：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００５９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
If equipped
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
:
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
55
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.60)
(P.60)
(P.61)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.62)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
ACTIVATION INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P.62)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.61)
(P.62)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P.62)
(P.62)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR
(P.58)
(P.59)
(P.362)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.56, 361)
(P.56, 361)
(P.56)
(P.57)
(P.60)
(P.60)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.57, 363)
(P.58)
(P.57)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
INDICATOR
(P.59)
(P.59)
DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR (P.61)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
U.S. model with automatic transmission is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １７：５４：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
See page .
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
notfastenyourseatbeltbeforethe
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
362
17
361
361
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Instrument Panel Indicators
56
０７／０８／０６ １２：１４：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page .
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver’s seat position sensor, or the
front passenger’s weight sensors.
For more information, see page .
1.
2.
29
363
29
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
57
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
０７／０８／０６ １２：１５：０５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page .
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page ).
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages and ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
280
78
324 326
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Instrument Panel Indicators
58
０７／０８／０６ １２：１５：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). For more
information, see page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
349
371
284
V6 models with automatic transmission
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Fuel Economy Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
59
０７／０８／０６ １２：１５：２０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
If this indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position and release the parking
brake, it means there is a problem
withtheDRL.Theremayalsobea
problem with the high beam
headlights. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page ).
This indicator will also come on
when the light switch is in AUTO
and the lights turn on automatically.
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5
)offuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
70
72
312
Canadian models only
EX-L and all V6 models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator Low Fuel IndicatorDaytime Running Lights
Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
60
０７／０８／０６ １８：３８：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
remindsyouthatitistimetotake
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
The appropriate indicator comes on
if the trunk or either door is not
closed tightly.
All the indicators come on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
204
297
Security System IndicatorMaintenance Minder
Indicator
Door and Trunk Open Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
61
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
DRIVER’S
DOOR OPEN
INDICATOR
TRUNK
OPEN
INDICATOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：１５：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page .
1.
2.
3.
210
210
282
282
282 73
If equipped
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator Cruise Main Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
62
０７／０８／０６ １２：１５：５４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
If equipped:
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
63
U.S. A/T model is shown.
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
TRIP METER
ODOMETER/CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE
SELECT/RESET KNOB
INFORMATION DISPLAY
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
The information display shows the
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life,
outside temperature (if equipped),
and maintenance item code(s).
To switch the display, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, what you last selected is
displayed.
Gauges
Odometer
Information Display
64
INFORMATION DISPLAY
ODOMETER
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER B
ENGINE OIL
LIFE
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００６９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
The trip meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, what you last
selected is displayed.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom mark to about the
middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper zone. If it reaches the red
(hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine cooling system.
359
Fuel Gauge Temperature GaugeTrip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
65
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−−−−
−−−
±±
Select the outside temperature
display, then press and hold the
select/reset knob for 10 seconds.
The following sequence will appear
for1secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5,
4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,
3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
select/reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the select/
reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
If equipped
Outside Temperature Indicator
Gauges
66
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：２４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the information
display after you start the engine.
For more information, see page .
297
251
Maintenance MinderCheck Fuel Cap Message
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
67
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
If equipped
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.3:
1:
2:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
68
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
INTERFACE DIAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.73) (P.69)
(P.30)
(P.161)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.74)
(P.75)
(P.101)
(P.210)
(P.70, 73)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.198)
(P.283)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
(P.76)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS
(P.218)
HORN
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS/
FOG LIGHTS
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH
2
3
3
3
1
2
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
andholdit.Thewashersspray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to
the shortest delay
( position), the wipers
change to low speed operation
when the vehicle speed exceeds 12
mph (20 km/h).
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Windshield Wipers
OFF
MIST
INT
Windshield Washers
LO
HI
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Instruments and Controls
69
ADJUSTMENT RING
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：４７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
Turning the switch to
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and indicator lights
AUTO
Headlights on
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Fog lights off
Fog lights on
If equipped
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
Push the left lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
60
Turn Signal
Headlights
High Beams
Turn Signals and Headlights
70
V6 model is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１６：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights and
all other exterior lights, when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO at any time.
The lights will come on automatically
when the outside light level becomes
low (at dusk, for example). The
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. The lights and indicator
will turn off automatically when the
system senses high ambient light.
The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the position.
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
thatyouturnonthelightsmanually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
weekormore).Youshouldalsoturn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time. The automatic lighting feature is
controlledbyasensorlocatedontop
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
EX-L and all V6 models
Headlights
AUTO
Instruments and Controls
71
LIGHT SENSOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：０３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
With the headlight switch off or in
the position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you remove the key
and close the driver’s door.
The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position (if equipped), and you
remove the key, then open and close
the driver’s door.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door and get out, the lights turn
off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position).
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights on
reminder chime.
Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights
Headlights
72
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：０９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The select/reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness with the ignition switch in
the ON (II) position and the parking
lights on.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position (if equipped), you can also
use the fog lights when the
headlights turn on automatically.
They will go off when the headlights
turn off, or the daytime running
lights are on.
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
CONTINUED
All V6 models
Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness
Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
73
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：１７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
The level of brightness is shown on
the information display while you
adjust it. It goes out about 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or . Turning the select/
reset knob to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignitionswitch,thengotonormal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
Hazard Warning Button
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
74
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
U.S. model is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：２５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００７９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page .
The defogger will shut itself off
withinabout10to30minutes
according to the outside temperature
(over 32°F, 0°C).
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive. 103
On vehicles with automatic air
conditioning system
Except U.S. LX and LX-S
Rear Window Defogger
Instruments and Controls
75
Manual A/C type
U.S. LX, LX-S
Auto A/C type
Vehicles with navigation system
Except U.S. LX,
LX-S
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：３３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steering Wheel Adjustments
76
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：３９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the trunk
release handle, and glove box locked
when you leave your vehicle and the
valet key at a parking facility.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
77
MASTER
KEY WITH
REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
VALET KEY
(Light Grey)
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：４７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you lose your key and you cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
78
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１７：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), START (III)
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in Park.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
LOCK (0)
START (III)
ON (II)
ACCESSORY (I)
Ignition Switch
Instruments and Controls
79
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
０７／０８／０６ １２：１８：０３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When the door is unlocked, you can
seetheredindicatoronthelocktab
above the inner door handle.
Youcanopenorclosethewindows
and the moonroof (if equipped) by
using the key in the driver’s door
(see page ).
To lock both doors, push the front of
the master door lock switch on
either door, pull the lock tab
rearward on the driver’s door, or use
the key on the outside lock on the
driver’s door.
Pushing forward the lock tab on the
driver’s door only unlocks that door.
Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock both
doors.
The lock tab on the passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
Both doors can be locked from the
outsidebyusingthekeyinthe
driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the key, turn it
clockwise, and release it. The
passenger’s door unlocks when you
turn the key a second time within a
few seconds.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
locktabrearwardorpushthefront
of the master switch, then close the
door.
106
Door Locks
80
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
RED INDICATOR
LOCK TAB
０７／０８／０６ １７：５４：５０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
The doors lock whenever you
move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
This is the default setting.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and apply
the parking brake. Make all settings
before you start driving.
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, lockout prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With either door open and the
key in the ignition switch, locking
with master door lock switch is
disabled. If the driver’s door is
closed, the lock tab on the driver’s
door is not disabled. Pulling the
driver’s lock tab rearward will lock
both doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pulling the lock tab
rearward, the driver’s door lock tab
pops out and unlocks the driver’s
door.
CONTINUED
Lockout Prevention
Auto Door LockingAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
０７／０８／０６ １２：１８：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locks both doors when the shift lever is
moved out of the Park (P) position (A/T
vehicles only).
To program the Park Lock mode:To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
Door Locks
82
０７／０８／０６ １２：１８：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
push and hold the
brake pedal, and move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.
4.
On A/T vehicles,
On A/T vehicles,
Locks both doors when the vehicle’s
speed reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
83
０７／０８／０６ １２：１８：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
The auto door unlocking feature
has five possible settings:
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
the driver’s door
unlocks when you move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
This is the default setting on M/T
vehicles.
This is the default setting.
Both doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to the Park (P)
position (A/T vehicles).
Both doors unlock whenever you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On A/T vehicles,
Auto Door Unlocking
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
Door Locks
84
０７／０８／０６ １２：１８：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００８９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate
.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
driver’s door unlock
feature.
Unlocks the driver’s door or both doors
when the shift lever is moved into the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles only).
both doors unlock
feature
Unlocks the driver’s door or both doors
when the ignition switch is moved out of
the ON (II) position.
CONTINUED
To program the Park Unlock mode: To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
０７／０８／０６ １２：１９：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
push and hold the
brake pedal, then move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.
Even though your vehicle’s battery is
removed or goes dead, the system
keeps the auto door lock/unlock
setting which you selected.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate
.
4.
5.
6.
3.
On A/T vehicles,
driver’s door unlock
feature.
On A/T vehicles,
both doors unlock
feature
Door Locks
86
０７／０８／０６ １２：１９：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the passenger’s door.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you push the button.
The ceiling light and the door
activated spotlights (if equipped)
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button if the lights are in
the door activated position. If you do
not open either door within 30
seconds, the light(s) will fade out. If
you relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light(s) will go off
immediately.
If you do not open either door within
30 seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
You can also open both power
windows and the moonroof (if
equipped) from outside the vehicle
with the remote transmitter (see
page ).
Press and hold this
button for about 2 seconds to attract
attention: the horn will sound and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.
Press this button once to
lock both doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a beep to verify that the
doors are locked and that the
security system (if equipped) has set.
You cannot lock the doors if either
door is not fully closed or the key is
in the ignition switch.
106
CONTINUED
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK
PANIC
TRUNK
LOCK
Instruments and Controls
87
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
LED
０７／０８／０６ １２：１９：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Battery type: CR1616
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
NOTE: Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the screw
can strip out.
1.
2.
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter BatteryRemote Transmitter Care
88
SCREW
０７／０８／０６ １２：１９：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Install the parts in reverse order.
4.
5.
3.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
89
BATTERY
TAB
０７／０８／０６ １２：１９：３４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
Youcanopenthetrunkintwoways:
Pull up on the trunk release lever
to the left of the driver’s seat.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
Lockthetrunkreleaseleverwith
the master key.
Give the person the valet key.
1.
2.
51
Trunk
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
90
Pull
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
MASTER KEY
０７／０８／０６ １２：１９：４２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page .
Even if the trunk release lever is
locked with the master key, you can
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter.
To open the trunk, push the release
leverinthedirectionindicatedbythe
arrow.
37
Trunk
Emergency Trunk Opener
Instruments and Controls
91
０７／０８／０６ １２：１９：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
The controls for the power
adjustable driver’s seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving.
The front passenger’s seat adjusts
manually.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
11 13
Except LX and EX
Seats
Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments
92
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
11 13
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
FrontSeatManualAdjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
93
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to one of its three positions.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
the release lever up on the side of
the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
LX and EX models On all V6 models and 2.4 EX-L model
Armrest Rear Seat AccessDriver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Driver’s Side
Seats
94
RELEASE LEVER
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：１５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ００９９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
up on the seat-back adjustment lever.
The seat-back will tilt forward to
allow easier entry to the rear seat.
After a passenger gets into the rear
seat, push the seat-back to the
upright position and push the whole
seat backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
To get into the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, push downward on
the release lever at the base of the
seat-back, or pull up on the seat-back
adjustment lever. The seat-back will
tilt forward and the entire seat will
move forward to allow easier entry to
the rear seat.
LX and EX models
Passenger’s Side
Seats
Instruments and Controls
95
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER
RELEASE LEVER
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER
To avoid damaging the seat-back angle
adjustment motor, do not operate the
seat-back angle switch when the seat-
back is tilted f orward.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：２２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１００
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
See page for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
13
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint.Donotattempttoadjustit
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
Head Restraints
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Seats
96
Front
CUSHION
RELEASE
BUTTON
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
Removing the Head Restraint
Seats
Instruments and Controls
97
CUSHION
Rear Center
SEAT-BACKLEGS
RELEASE
BUTTON
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
Seats
Active Head Restraints
98
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：４３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The back of the rear seat folds down,
giving you direct access to the trunk.
The seat-back is released from inside
the trunk.
When storing cargo, you can move
therearcentershoulderbeltoutof
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.
To release the seat-back from inside
the trunk, pull the release under the
trunk panel. Push the seat-back
down from inside the trunk, or pull
the seat-back down from inside the
vehicle.
Remove any items from the seat
beforeyoufolddowntheseat-back.
CONTINUED
Folding Rear Seat
Seats
Instruments and Controls
99
GUIDE
CENTER
SHOULDER BELT
RELEASE
Pull
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：５１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not press against the front
passenger’s seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
improperly.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
back, and the center shoulder belt is
re-positioned in the guide whenever
the seat-back is in its upright position.
Be sure there are no twists in any
shoulder belt.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Looseitemscanflyforwardand
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See on page
.
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See on
page .
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
If the rear head restraints get caught
on the front seat backs and you
cannot fold down the rear seat-back
fully, you can remove the head
restraints (see page ).
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored. 261
51
97
Seats
Carrying Cargo
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
100
０７／０８／０６ １２：２０：５８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
Push the right side of the switch, HI,
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
EX-L and all V6 models
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
101
Driver’s
Seat
Passenger’s
Seat
HEATERS
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
1.
2.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
102
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
3.
4.
AllCanadianmodels
U.S. EX, EX-L and all V6 models
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters
Instruments and Controls
103
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
V6 model without navigation system
is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：１８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower either
window. To open a window, push the
switchdownandholdit.Releasethe
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
To open either window
fully (driver’s window only on LX),
push the window switch firmly down
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close either window fully (driver’s
window only on LX), pull back the
window switch firmly to the second
detent, then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
Power Windows
AUTO
104
MAIN SWITCH
DRIVER’S
WINDOW
SWITCH
INDICATOR
PASSENGER’S
WINDOW SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：２４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１０９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
The indicators inside the window
switches come on when the light
control switch is in either or
position with the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position
(driver’s window switch only on LX).
Only on the driver’s window,
the auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the
switch.
When you push the main switch in,
the indicator comes on and the
passenger’s window cannot be raised
or lowered. Use the main switch
whenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the window
unintentionally. To cancel this
feature, push on the switch again.
The switch will pop out and the
indicator will go off.
The windows and the main switch
feature will operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either door
cancels this function.
If either
window (driver’s window only on
LX) senses any obstacle while it is
closing automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
Power Windows
AUTO REVERSE
Instruments and Controls
105
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：３１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can open and close the windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) with
the key in the driver’s door lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
To open:
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.
Youcanopenbothwindowsandthe
moonroof (if equipped) from the
outside with the remote transmitter.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s door unlocks, and
both windows and the moonroof
start to open. To stop the windows
and moonroof, release the button.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter
Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Key
Power Windows
106
Open
Close
UNLOCK
BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To close:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. Both windows and the
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. Both windows
and the moonroof start to close.
To stop the windows and the
moonroof, release the key.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
107
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− To open the moonroof
fully, pull back the moonroof switch
firmly, then release it. The moonroof
automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
To open or close the moonroof
partially, lightly pull the switch back
or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To open the moonroof, pull back on
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, push the switch forward
andholdit.Releasetheswitchto
stop the operation.
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch on
the front ceiling to operate the
moonroof. You must turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof.
If equipped
AUTO
Moonroof
108
MOONROOF SWITCH
Open
Close
Tilt
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２１：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can use the remote transmitter
or the key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
for details.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either door cancels this
function.
106
Operating the Moonroof with the
Remote Transmitter or the Key
Auto Reverse
Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
109
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page ).57
Parking Brake
110
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：０５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
111
VANITY MIRROR
SUN VISOR
TRUNK
CENTER POCKETS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
COAT HOOK
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
DOOR POCKET
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDER
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：１０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Glove Box Beverage Holders
Interior Convenience Items
112
To lock
GLOVE BOX
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The console compartment is
equipped with a detachable tray.
To remove this tray, slide it forward,
then pull it up.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
Open the front beverage holder by
pulling up on the lid.
Each rear side panel also has a
beverage holder.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the
armrest.
Except LX
Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment
Instruments and Controls
113
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
FRONT
DETACHABLE TRAY
LEVER
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：２４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Your vehicle has two accessory
power sockets; one is at the front of
the center console and the other is in
the console compartment.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects getting into the
socket.
Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Sockets
114
FRONT CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：３１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１１９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror lights come on
when you pull up the cover.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
then release the indent. It will
unlatch and swing down. To close it,
push it until it latches. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
CONTINUED
Interior Convenience Items
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Sunglasses Holder
Instruments and Controls
115
SUN VISOR
Push
Slide
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To use a coat hook, pull it down.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
Pull up the lid to open each pocket.
Coat Hook Center Pocket
Interior Convenience Items
116
COAT HOOK
Vehicle without navigation system
is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
Unlock the driver’s door with the
keyorremotetransmitter.
Open either door.
After both doors are closed tightly,
the light dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds.
If you leave either door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after about 15
minutes.
CONTINUED
Ceiling Light Spotlights
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
117
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
LX
０７／０８／０６ １２：２２：５６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The spotlights (with the switch in
the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Your vehicle has a courtesy light in
the ignition switch. This light comes
on when you open the driver’s door.
It fades out in about 30 seconds after
the door is closed.
The spotlights have a two-position
switch. In the DOOR position, the
lights come on when you open either
door. The lights fade out in about 30
seconds after the doors are closed
tightly. In the OFF position, the
lights do not come on.
Except LX
Courtesy Lights
Interior Lights
118
DOOR ACTIVATED SPOTLIGHT
OFF POSITION
０７／０８／０６ １２：２３：０２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the select/reset
knob on the instrument panel, with
the ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
Except LX
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
119
COURTESY LIGHT
０７／０８／０６ １２：２３：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
120
０７／０８／０６ １２：２３：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 122
...............Climate Control System . 127
..........Dual Temperature Control . 132
..............Climate Control Sensors . 134
................................Audio System . 135
................................Audio System . 136
..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 137
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 144
.................................Playing Discs . 150
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 160
................................Audio System . 161
..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 162
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 174
.................................Playing Discs . 181
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 192
..................Protecting Your Discs . 193
............FM/AM Radio Reception . 196
................Remote Audio Controls . 198
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 199
.................Radio Theft Protection . 200
..........................Setting the Clock . 201
............................Security System . 204
.........................................Compass . 206
...............................Cruise Control . 210
HomeLink
Universal
................................Transceiver . 213
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 218
Models without navigation system
Models with navigation system
Except LX
Features
Features
121
０７／０８／０６ １２：２３：１４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２６
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊
＊
: If equipped
Vents, Heating, and A/C
LX, LX-S and EX
122
MODE CONTROL
BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
０７／０８／０６ １２：２３：１８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicatorinthebuttonisonwhen
the A/C is on.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the , A/C,
or any of the mode buttons cancels
MAX A/C.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
/
75
CONTINUED
Except U.S. LX and LX-S
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Temperature Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
MAX A/C Button
Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger
Button
Mode Control
Features
123
０７／０８／０６ １２：２３：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode from
or to , the system
keeps the A/C on. The A/C
indicator will not come on if it was
off to start with.
To turn off the A/C, press the A/C
button to illuminate the indicator,
then press it again to turn off the
A/C.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you switch to or
mode from , the A/C
turnsoff.Butifitwasontostart
with, the A/C stays on.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
You cannot turn the A/C off in this
mode.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select .
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode
from or , the system
also automatically turns on the
A/C. This helps prevent the
windows from fogging up
unintendedly. The A/C indicator
willnotcomeonifitwasoffto
start with (see the first column on
this page).
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Ventilation
Using the Heater
124
０７／０８／０６ １２：２３：５１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１２９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects , and
switches to recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Turn the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
65
If the interior is very warm,
Dehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
125
０７／０８／０６ １２：２４：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
When you switch to , from
or , the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
buttoncomesonandthengoesoff.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator does not come
on if it was off to start with.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was off to start with.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select / to help
clear the rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Defog and Defrost To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Vents, Heating, and A/C
126
０７／０８／０６ １２：２４：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Climate Control System
With navigation system
Without navigation system
EX-L and all V6
Features
127
AUTO BUTTON
AIR
CONDITIONING
BUTTON
AUTO
INDICATOR
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
OFF BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL SWITCH
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
AIR
CONDITIONING
BUTTON
FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SWITCH
FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DUAL
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
HEATED
MIRROR
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
AUTO
INDICATOR
CENTER
DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL
BAR
AUTO
BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
FRONT PASSENGER’S
SIDE TEMPERATURE
MODE
CONTROL
BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２４：２２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels.
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference.
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
Press the Auto button. The
indicator in the button also comes
on as a reminder. You will see
AUTO on the display (in the
center display on models with
navigation system).
Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control switch.
You can set the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s
side temperature separately.
The driver’s side temperature and
the passenger’s side temperature can
be set separately. Push up the switch
of the appropriate temperature
control to increase the temperature
of airflow. Push down the switch to
decrease it. Each set temperature is
showninthedisplay(inthecenter
display on models with navigation
system).
1.
2.
On models with navigation system
Using Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System
Temperature Control
Climate Control System
128
０７／０８／０６ １２：２４：３０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When the indicator in the dual
button is on, the driver’s side and
passenger’s side temperature can be
controlled independently (see page
).
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
When you adjust a fan control, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior
temperature is independently
regulated for the driver and front
passenger according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
basedontheinformationofthesun
light sensor and the sun position
which is updated automatically by
the navigation’s global positioning
system (GPS). For example, if the
driver’s side of the vehicle is getting
too much sun, the system will adjust
to a lower temperature.
You can set the temperatures for the
driver’s side and the passenger’s side
separately when this button is
pressed (indicator is on). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
the temperatures for both sides are
synchronized to the driver’s side set
temperature. When defrost mode is
selected, dual mode operation is
canceled.
If you press the OFF button, the
climate control system shuts off
completely.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
132
On models with navigation system
Climate Control System
Dual Button
To Turn Everything Off
Features
129
０７／０８／０６ １２：２４：３９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲
▼
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Push the switch up to increase the
fanspeedandairflow.Pushthe
switch down to decrease them.
This button turns the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
Press the side of the bar to
increase the fan speed and airflow.
Press the side of the bar to
decrease them.
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Recirculation ButtonAir Conditioning (A/C) Button
Fan Control
Semi-automatic Operation
Climate Control System
130
０７／０８／０６ １２：２４：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows, set as follows:
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Adjust the temperature with the
driver’s side temperature control
so the airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
For faster defogging, manually set
the fan speed to high.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When the indicator in the button is
on, the front passenger’s
temperature cannot be set separately
from the driver’s.
1.
2.
3.
4.
75
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control
Windshield Defroster Button
Climate Control System
Features
131
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has two temperature
control switches, one for the driver,
and one for the front passenger.
Thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s
side temperature can be controlled
independently by adjusting these
switches when the green indicator in
the DUAL button is on.
Push AUTO or . The selected
temperatures appear in the display
(in the center display on models with
navigation system). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature by pushing the
driver’s side temperature control
switch up or down.
EX-L and all V6
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control
132
DUAL BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
Without navigation system
With navigation system
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then push the switch up or down on
the driver’s side. To set the
passenger’s side to a different value
than the driver’s, push the switch up
or down on the passenger’s side. You
can adjust the passenger’s side
without pressing the DUAL button
first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
Dual Temperature Control
Features
133
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：１８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
On models with climate control system
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
Climate Control Sensors
134
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１３９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages through .
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages through .
160136
192161
Audio System
Features
135
EX-L and all V6 models without
navigation system
With navigation system
LX, LX-S and EX models
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：３３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Most audio system functions can be
controlled by standard buttons, bars,
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to scroll through lists, to make
selections or adjustments to a list or
menu item on the display. When you
make a selection, push the center of
the selector (ENTER) to go to that
selection.
When the audio system is in XM
satellite radio mode or playing discs,
pushing the selector (ENTER) knob
switches the display between the
normal display and the extended
display. The extended display has
three segments to display the
detailed information.
To select any setting such as a clock,
sound adjusting, or the compass (if
equipped), press the MENU button
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
You can select the item by turning
the selector knob. To go back to the
previous display, press the RETURN
button.
Pressing the MENU button again
will also cancel the menu display
mode.
Selector Knob Menu Display
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
136
SELECTOR
KNOB
MENU
BUTTON
RETURN
BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：３９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Without XM satellite radio
With XM
satellite radio
Features
137
SKIP BAR
SELECTOR
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
RETURN BUTTON
A.SEL (AUTO
SELECT) BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
MENU BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SELECTOR
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
RETURN BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
A.SEL (AUTO
SELECT) BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
MENU BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
FOLDER BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
AM
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the or side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
.
Use the selector knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
Each time you press and release
either side of the SKIP bar, the radio
frequency changes in small
increments.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
140
To Select a StationTo Play the Radio
SKIP
TUNE
SCAN
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
138
０７／０８／０６ １２：２５：５８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
Usethetune,skip,scan,orRDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
196
To turn off auto select
Preset AUTO SELECT
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
139
０７／０８／０６ １２：２６：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name according to
the information provided by the
radio data system (RDS).
Theprogramservicenamedisplay
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off. To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see ‘‘PS ON’’ message on the display.
If the station you are listening to is
an RDS station, the displayed
frequency switches to the station
name.
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘PS OFF.’’
Radio Data System (RDS)
Program Service (PS) Name Display
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
140
PROGRAM SERVICE
NAME DISPLAY ON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２６：１４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲▼
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side ( or ) of the CATEGORY
bar (FOLDER bar on models without
XM radio) to display and select an
RDS category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows;
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 of hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Religion music and
religion talk
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sport, talk,
foreign language, personality, public,
college, and weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar (FOLDER bar on models without
XM radio) to select an RDS category.
The display shows the selected RDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is cancelled.
COUNTRY: Country music
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
( or ) of the SKIP bar. You
will see the selected RDS category
name blinking while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
CONTINUED
Radio Data System (RDS) Category RDS Program Search
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
141
RDS CATEGORY
０７／０８／０６ １２：２６：２７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
PS name display function is off. In
this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a PS name.
Press the MENU button to display
the sound settings. Turn the selector
knob to select an appropriate setting:
bass, treble, fader, balance, SUBW
(subwoofer) and SVC (speed-
sensitive volume compensation).
Press the selector (ENTER) knob to
enter the setting, then turn the
selector knob to adjust the setting.
If equipped:
RDS Program SCAN
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
142
Selector knob adjustable
direction is shown.
FADER is selectable.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２６：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Adjusts the bass.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the strength of
sound from the subwoofer speaker.
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
To return to the normal playing,
push the RETURN or MENU button
after you stop adjusting a mode.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
73
If equipped
BASS
Audio System Lighting
BALANCE
FADER
TREBLE
SUBW
SVC
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
143
SUBWOOFER is selectable.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２６：４７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system)
144
CATEGORY BAR
XM RADIO BUTTON
MENU BUTTONRETURN BUTTON SELECTOR KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
SKIP BAR
０７／０８／０６ １２：２６：５３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１４９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
To listen to XM satellite radio, turn
the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,
and press the button. The
last channel you listened to will show
in the display. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes.
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, and Canada, except
Hawaii and Alaska. XM
is a
registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
XM satellite radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM satellite radio allows you to view
channel and category selections in
the display.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the display changes in
the following sequence: name, title,
and category.
You can also change the mode from
the menu items. Press the MENU
button to display the menu items,
then turn the selector knob to select
MODE/CATEGORY and press the
selector knob (ENTER). Each time
you press and release the selector
knob (ENTER), the display changes
between CHANNEL and
CATEGORY. To enter the setting,
press the TITLE button.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
CONTINUED
Operating the Satellite Radio
MODE
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system)
Features
145
０７／０８／０６ １２：２７：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
▼▲−−
The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Press
either side of the CATEGORY bar to
select another category.
You can also select a channel or
category from the list by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to the list displayed with three
segments, then turn the knob to
select a channel or category. Press
the selector knob (ENTER) to set
your selection.
Turn the selector knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
SCAN
CATEGORY ( or )TUNE
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system)
146
Channel list is shown.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２７：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the button. Either
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.
Use the selector knob, or the
CATEGORYbarorSCANbutton
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM button again. The
other XM band will show. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
3.
4.
5.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Preset
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system)
Features
147
０７／０８／０６ １２：２７：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system)
148
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
０７／０８／０６ １２：２７：２８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
Satellite Radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ will
appear in the display, and you’ll be
able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
, or call 1-877-438-
9677. You will need to give them
your radio I.D. number and your
credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
www.xmradio.ca
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system)
Features
149
０７／０８／０６ １２：２７：３６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Without XM satellite radio
With XM satellite radio
150
SCAN
BUTTON
MENU BUTTON
SKIP BAR
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
FOLDER BAR
SELECTOR
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
RETURN BUTTON
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
DISC LOAD
BUTTON
DISC SLOT
CD BUTTON
DISC
EJECT
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
MENU BUTTON
SKIP BAR
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
SELECTOR
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
RETURN BUTTON
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
DISC LOAD
BUTTON
DISC
EJECT
BUTTON
DISC SLOT
CD/AUX BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
０７／０８／０６ １２：２７：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. The disc, folder and track
numbers are displayed. You can
select up to 255 folders or tracks.
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
(MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Sampling frequency:
22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsYou operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD/AUX or CD button. You will see
‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc and
track numbers, and the elapsed time
areshowninthedisplay.Youcan
also select the displayed information
with the TITLE button (see page
). The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
153
CONTINUED
To Play a Disc
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Features
151
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０８／０６ １２：２７：５７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holdsuptosixdiscs.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this unit.
When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.
Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in
the display. To load only one disc,
press and release the LOAD
button.
The disc number for an empty
position begins blinking.
Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Loading Discs
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
152
０７／０８／０６ １２：２８：０５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to about 32 characters of the text
data.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text data on a disc, if the disc was
recorded with text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheTITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the TITLE button.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
CONTINUED
Text Data Display Function
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Features
153
０７／０８／０６ １２：２８：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Use the SKIP bar while a disc is
playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA
mode).
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the
FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar on
models with XM satellite radio) to
select folders in the disc and use
either side of the skip bar to change
files.
To select a different disc, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page ).
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSKIPbar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
releasethe sideofthebarto
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar.In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also
select a folder or track/file from the
list by using the selector knob. Push
the selector knob (ENTER) to
switch the display to the list
displayed with three segments, then
turn the knob to select a folder.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
change the display to the track/file
list, then turn the same knob to
select a track/file. Press the selector
knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
152
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
154
Folder Selection
Press ENTER
Track Selection
０７／０８／０６ １２：２８：２４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１５９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
▲▼
▲
▼
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
MENU button and the selector knob.
Push the MENU button to display
themenuitems,thenturnthe
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set the selection.
To
select a different folder, press either
side ( or ) of the FOLDER bar
(CATEGORY bar on models with
XM satellite radio) to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the sidetoskiptothenextfolder,
andpressthe sidetoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set your selection.
To cancel the selected repeat,
random, or scan mode, press the
MENU button to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press the selector
knob (ENTER). When you see
‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTER
again.
In MP3 or WMA mode
CONTINUED
To select repeat, random or scan
mode:
FOLDER SELECTION
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Features
155
MENU ITEMS
PLAY MODE ITEMS
０７／０８／０６ １２：２８：３３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
This
feature, when activated, plays the
files within a current folder in
random order, rather than in the
order they are compressed in MP3
or WMA. To activate folder random
play, select the folder random mode
from the menu items. You will see
F-RANDOM in the display. The
system will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
selecting the normal play mode, or
you select a different folder with the
FOLDERbar(CATEGORYbaron
models with XM satellite radio).
To
continuously replay a track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode), select the
track repeat mode from the menu
items. You will see REPEAT in the
display. Select the normal play mode
to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off the repeat feature.
This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, select the folder repeat mode
from the menu items. You will see
F-REPEAT in the display. The
system continuously replays the
current folder. Select the normal
play mode to turn it off. Selecting a
different folder with the FOLDER
bar (CATEGORY bar on models
with XM satellite radio) also turns
off the repeat feature.
This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To active disc repeat, select the disc
repeat mode from the menu items.
You will see D-REPEAT in the
display. Select the normal play mode
to turn it off.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, select the disc
random play from the menu items.
You will see RANDOM in the display.
Selectthenormalplaymodeto
return to normal play.
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER RANDOM
REPEAT (Track Repeat)
FOLDER REPEAT
DISC REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
156
０７／０８／０６ １２：２８：３９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder on the disc in the order
they are recorded. To activate the
folder scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see F-SCAN in the display.
The system will then play the first
file in the main folders for about 10
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then play the following
first files for 10 seconds each. When
it plays a file that you want to
continue listening to, press and hold
the SCAN button.
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page ).
You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page ).
Pressing either side of the skip bar,
or selecting a different disc (using
the preset buttons) or folder (using
the FOLDER or CATEGORY bar)
turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN
feature.
155
155
CONTINUED
In MP3 or WMA mode
SCAN
F-SCAN
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Features
157
０７／０８／０６ １２：２８：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− This feature, when
activated, samples the first track in
each disc in order (the first file in
themainfolderoneachdiscinMP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until
D-SCAN shows in the display. The
system will then play the first track/
file in the first main folder in the first
disc for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then play
the following first tracks/files for 10
seconds each. When it plays a track/
file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button again.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
playing.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal playing.
When the first track in the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
in the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either side of the skip bar
or selecting a different folder with
the FOLDER or CATEGORY bar
also turns off the scan feature.
You can also select the disc scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page ).
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD (CD/AUX on models
with XM satellite radio) button again
to switch back to the disc changer.
155
In MP3 or WMA mode
D-SCAN To Stop Playing a Disc
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
158
０７／０８／０６ １７：５４：５８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM).
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
193
Protecting Discs
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Features
159
０７／０８／０６ １２：２８：５８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
SolutionError Message Cause
194
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 194). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
High temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Disc Changer Error Message (Models without navigation system)
160
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０７／０８／０６ １２：２９：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a knob and a selector.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER)togotothatselection.
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
Interface Dial Voice Control System
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
161
ENTER
SELECTOR
KNOB
０７／０８／０６ １２：２９：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
162
INTERFACE DIAL
CENTER DISPLAY
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO
SELECT) BAR
SKIP BAR
NAVIGATION SCREEN
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
TUNE BAR
FM/AM BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２９：１８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob or the FM/AM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the right side of the bar to
tune to a higher frequency, or the
left side to tune to a lower frequency.
To tune with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and turn the knob
to TUNE icon. Then press ENTER
on the selector, and turn the knob to
the desired frequency. To exit the
TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
selector.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the FM/AM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
center display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
preset buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
.166
CONTINUED
To Play the FM/AM Radio
TUNETo Select a Station
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
163
STEREO ICON
BAND
TUNE ICON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２９：２７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
The skip (seek)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side ( or
) of the skip bar, then release it.
You can also activate the skip
function (SEEK is displayed on the
screen) by pushing the interface
selector to the right or left.
The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar, then release it.
To scan with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and then push it
to the right. You will see SCAN
flashing on the screen.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
press the scan side of the bar again,
or push the interface selector to the
right again.
Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
onAMandtwofrequenciesonFM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen
icons).
1.
To store a preset memory location:
SKIP (SEEK)
SCAN
Preset
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
164
SCAN ICON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２９：３４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１６９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Usethetune,skip(seek),scan,or
RDS function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Push the interface selector down to
scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
A.SEL on the screen, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds.
press ENTER
on the interface selector.
You can also press the A.SEL side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
A.SEL on the screen, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. The system stores the
frequencies of six AM and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
2.
3.
4.
To turn off auto select,
AUTO SELECT
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
165
A.SEL INDICATOR
PRESET ICON
A.SEL ICON
０７／０８／０６ １２：２９：４２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘PS ON’’ message on the
center display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name according to
the information provided by the
radio data system (RDS).
Theprogramservicenamedisplay
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
,pressthe
A. SEL side of the bar. This restores
the presets you originally set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.196
To turn off auto select
Radio Data System (RDS)
Program Service (PS) Name Display
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
166
PS ON MESSAGE
０７／０８／０６ １２：２９：５０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 of hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Religion music and
religion talk
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sport, talk,
foreign language, personality, public,
college, and weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
display the radio information on the
screen. Push down the selector on
the interface dial, then turn the knob
to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER to set your selection. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows;
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency with the PS
name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘PS OFF.’’
ALL: All RDS category stations
CONTINUED
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
167
RDS SEARCH ICON
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：０２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲▼
You can also select an RDS category
with the CATEGORY bar. Press
either side ( or ) of the
CATEGORY bar to display an RDS
category in the center display. Select
a category by pressing either side of
the bar.
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
( or ) of the SKIP bar. You
will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking in the center
display while searching it. When the
system finds a station, the selected
RDS category name will be displayed
again for about 5 seconds in the
center display.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
Turn the selector to select an RDS
category. You can use search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category by pressing
the selector to the right repeatedly.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
If you do nothing while the RDS
category is selected, the selected
category is cancelled.
RDS Program Search
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
168
RDS CATEGORYRDS CATEGORY
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：１０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To activate RDS program search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the selector down, and turn the
knob to select RDS SEARCH icon.
Press ENTER on the selector. The
screen shows you the RDS category
list.
Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category. The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
SCAN in the center display. The
system will scan for a station with a
strong signal in the selected RDS
category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
searching it. When the system finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SEEK in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the seek function.
CONTINUED
RDS Program SCAN
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
169
SEEK/SCAN ICON
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：１７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category.
To activate RDS program scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
selector down, and turn the knob to
select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER on the selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SCAN in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the scan function.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
PS name display function is off. In
this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a PS name.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
170
SEEK/SCAN ICON
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：２４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.
To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the selector
down, and turn the knob to select
RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on
the selector to enter the setting.
The display shows up to about 64
characters of text data on the
selected RDS station.
If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.
Radio Text Display
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
171
The text is displayed
accordingtothe
information from RDS.
RADIO TEXT ICON
TEXT INDICATOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：３１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and
BALANCE are each adjustable. You
can also adjust the strength of the
sound coming from the subwoofer
speaker. In addition, you can set the
speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
Theseadjustmentscanbemadeby
the SOUND button or the interface
dial.
Selectthemodeyouwanttoadjust
by turning the interface dial.
You can also adjust the sound by
pushing the SOUND button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the center display as it changes.
Turn the power/volume knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
The system will return to the audio
playing mode in the center display
about 10 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
172
SOUND ICON
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：３９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
andpressENTERontheinterface
selector. The current setting is
shownonthedisplay.Turnthe
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
To adjust the
strength of the sound from the
subwoofer speaker, select it and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface knob to
the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. The default setting is MID.
To change the SVC mode, select
SVC, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. If you feel the sound is too
loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.
BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE
SUBWOOFER
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
173
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
174
AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIALTUNE BAR
CATEGORY BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
TITLE BUTTON
XM RADIO BUTTON
SKIP BAR
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO
SELECT) BAR
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：５０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１７９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, and Canada, except
Hawaii and Alaska. XM
is a
registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
XM Satellite Radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to
view channel and category selections
in the audio display.
Push the AUDIO button to display
XM information on the screen. You
can operate the XM Satellite Radio
system with the interface dial.
To listen to XM satellite radio, turn
the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,
and press the button. The
last channel you listened to will show
in the audio screen and the center
display. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
CONTINUED
Operating the XM Radio
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
175
０７／０８／０６ １２：３０：５７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes. The
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is
displayed on the screen. To switch
the mode with the interface dial,
push down the interface selector to
select AUDIO MENU, then turn the
knob to select MODE, and press
ENTER on the selector repeatedly.
In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
NAME (artist name), TITLE (music
title), and CHANNEL NAME
(channel name).
Onthescreen,youwillseethe
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
Press either side of the
TUNE bar to change channel
selections. Press the side of the
bar for higher numbered channels
and the side for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to select AUDIO MENU,
then turn the interface knob to
choose TUNE and press ENTER on
the selector. Turn the interface knob
to the appropriate direction. In the
category mode, you can only select
channels within that category.
Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU,thenturntheinterfaceknob
to select CHANNEL LIST and press
ENTERontheselector.Turnthe
interface knob to select a channel,
then press ENTER to set your
selection.
MODE
TUNE
CHANNEL LIST
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
176
０７／０８／０６ １２：３１：０３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
▼▲−
−
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the button or scroll
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.
Press
either side of the bar to select
another category. You can also
change a category by pushing the
interface selector left or right.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
SCAN,presstheSCANsideofthe
SCAN/A.SEL bar. To scan with the
interface dial, scroll down, and push
interface selector to the right. You
will see SCAN on the screen and
center display.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, push the
interface selector to the right again
or press the SCAN side of the bar to
cancel.
Use the tune, skip (seek), or scan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Preset
CATEGORY ( or )
SCAN
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
177
XM BAND
０７／０８／０６ １２：３１：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist, or
isnotpartofyour
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
XM is loading the
audio or program
information.
The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.
Press the button or scroll
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
5. ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
178
０７／０８／０６ １２：３１：２１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
179
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
０７／０８／０６ １２：３１：２８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
Satellite Radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, CAT
(category) or CH (channel) will
appear in the center display, and
you’ll be able to listen to XM Radio
broadcasts. XM Radio will continue
to send an activation signal to your
vehicle for at least 12 hours from the
activation request. If the service has
not been activated after 36 hours,
contact XM Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
, or call 1-877-438-
9677. You will need to give them
your radio I.D. number and your
credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press and release
the side of the TUNE bar until
‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D.
will appear in the display.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
www.xmradio.ca
Receiving XM Satellite Radio
Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
180
０７／０８／０６ １２：３１：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
181
SKIP BAR
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO
SELECT) BAR
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
CD BUTTON
INTERFACE DIALAUDIO BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
NAVIGATION SCREEN
CENTER DISPLAY
TITLE BUTTON
DISC SLOT
DISC LOAD BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：３１：４３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer with the same
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position.
The disc changer can play these disc
formats:
CD (CD-DA)
MP3/WMA
The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.
When playing a disc in MP3, you will
see ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display.
The changer can also play MP3 or
WMA format (see page ).
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio
system displays UNSUPPORTED in
the center display, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs will not
work in this unit.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
188
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
182
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０８／０６ １２：３１：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
With the ignition in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position, press and hold the LOAD
button until you hear a beep and
see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,
then release the button.
‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen
foranemptypositioninthe
changer. When the green load
indicator comes on and you see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,
insert the disc into the slot. Insert
it only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way.
Press and release the LOAD
button.
To load a single disc:
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system will
then begin playing the last disc
loaded.
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it
only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way. You
will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the center
display. When you insert the first
disc, the changer will start to play
the disc.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
If you press the LOAD button while
a disc is playing, the system will stop
playing that disc and start the
loading sequence. It will then play
the disc just loaded.
You can select the position to load a
disc. Turn the interface knob or
press a preset button to select the
position, then press ENTER on the
selector. This starts the loading
sequence. If you do not select the
position, the system loads the disc to
the first empty position in numerical
order.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damage
the audio unit.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
center display again, insert the
next disc into the slot.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Loading Discs in the Changer
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
183
０７／０８／０６ １２：３２：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you play CD-TEXT, you will
see the track name, artist name, and
album name on the screen. When
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will
see the track name and folder name
on the screen. If the disc was not
recorded with this information, it will
not be displayed.
The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,
and WMA formats.
Select the changer by pressing the
CD button. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
disc changer. You will see the
current disc position highlighted.
To select a different disc, press the
corresponding number on the preset
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc number,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar or push the
interface selector to the right, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side of the skip
barorpushtheinterfaceselectorto
thelefttoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
the side or push the interface
selector to the left again to skip to
the previous track. To move rapidly
within a track, press and hold either
side of the skip bar.
To Play a Disc To Change Tracks
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
184
CURRENT DISC
０７／０８／０６ １２：３２：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１８９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. Press ENTER on
the interface selector, and the track
list screen will be shown. If there are
no track names, track numbers are
displayed. You will see the current
track is highlighted. Turn the
interface knob to select the desired
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
To exit the track list display, press
the AUDIO button, or push the
interface selector to the left.
When you press the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A. SEL bar or scroll down
and push the interface selector to
the left, the next track of the current
track plays for about 10 seconds.
You will see SCAN next to TRACK
on the screen and center display. To
listen to the rest of the track, press
andholdtheSCANsideofthebar
until you hear a beep or push the
interface selector to the left again
within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next track, plays about 10
seconds of it, and continues through
the rest of the tracks the same way.
When you press the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedly
until you see D-SCAN in the center
display, or push down the interface
selector to the right, the first track of
the current disc plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
DISC on the screen. The disc
number is blinking and SCAN is also
shown in the center display. To listen
to the rest of the disc, press and hold
the SCAN side of the bar until you
hear a beep, or push down the
interface selector to the right again
within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
of its first track, and continues
through the rest of the discs the
same way. When the system reaches
the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,
and that disc continues to play.
To Choose a Track
Track Scan
Disc Scan
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
185
TRACK LIST
０７／０８／０６ １２：３２：２１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can select any type of repeat and
random modes by using the
interface dial.
Push the AUDIO button to display
the audio information on the screen,
then scroll down by pushing down
the selector to select the audio menu.
Turn the interface knob to select a
desired repeat or random mode, then
press ENTER to set your selection.
To cancel the selected repeat or
random mode, have the selected
mode highlighted, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To replay the current track
continuously, select TRACK
REPEAT, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see REPEAT next to
TRACKonthescreen.Toturnthis
feature off, highlight TRACK
REPEAT (if not already highlighted),
andpressENTERontheinterface
selector again.
To select repeat or random mode: Track Repeat
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
186
AUDIO MENU SCREEN
Push down the selector.
０７／０８／０６ １２：３２：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To replay the current disc
continuously, select DISC REPEAT,
andpressENTERontheinterface
selector. As a reminder, you will see
REPEAT next to DISC on the screen.
To turn this feature off, highlight
DISC REPEAT (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.
To play the tracks of the current disc
in random order, select TRACK
RANDOM, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see RANDOM next to
TRACKonthescreen.Toturnthis
feature off, highlight TRACK
RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.
To take the system out of disc mode,
press the FM/AM button, the
button, or the AUX button (if
an appropriate unit is connected). To
return to disc mode, press the CD
button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
Disc Repeat Random Play To Stop Playing a Disc
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
187
０７／０８／０６ １２：３２：３６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The changer plays MP3/WMA files
in recorded order. Each disc can
hold up to 400 playable files within 8
folder layers. When playing MP3
discs, a disc can support a maximum
number of 100 folders, and each
folder can hold 255 playable files.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
(MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Sampling frequency: 22.05/32/44.1/
48 kHz
Bit rate: 32/40/48/64/80/96/128/
160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
disc controls previously described,
along with the following information.
While playing an MP3/WMA disc,
you can select a folder within the
disc by pressing either side of the
category bar. Each time you press
either side of the bar, the folder title
and its first file’s information appear
in the center display in recorded
order.
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc Changing the Folders
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
188
０７／０８／０６ １２：３２：４６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Changing and Selecting the Folders/
Files
Using the interface selector, you can
see the list of all the files and folders
within a disc. While playing a MP3/
WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.
The currently playing folder and file
information comes on the screen.
Push the selector to show the folder
list. Turn the selector knob,
highlight the folder you want to see
the information within, and press
ENTER.
If the main folder has some
additional folders in the lower layer,
you can also see each lower folder
listedonthescreen.
You can see the list of all the files in
the selected folder. Turn the selector
knob, then press ENTER to set your
selection.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
189
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
CURRENT TRACK
CURRENT FOLDER
０７／０８／０６ １２：３２：５４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This feature, when activated, plays
all files in the current folder in
random order. To activate folder
random play, select FOLDER
RANDOM by interface knob, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. You will see RANDOM
next to FOLDER on the screen. To
turn this feature off, highlight
FOLDER RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.
This feature, when activated, replays
all files on the selected folder. To
activate folder repeat mode, select
FOLDER REPEAT by interface
knob, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
REPEAT next to FOLDER on the
screen. To turn this feature off,
highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file of each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A. SEL bar repeatedly. You will see
SCAN next to FOLDER and the
folder number blinking.
Toselectanytypeoftherepeat
modes, use the interface dial. For
more information, see page .
Toselectanytypeoftherandom
modes, use the interface dial. For
more information, see page .
To listen to the rest of the folder,
press and hold the SCAN side of the
bar until you hear a beep. If you do
not, the system advances to the next
folder, plays 10 seconds of it, and
continues throughout the rest of the
folder in the same way. When the
system samples the first file of all
folders, folder scan is canceled, and
the last file played continues to play.
186 186
Folder RandomFolder RepeatFolder Scan
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
190
０７／０８／０６ １２：３３：０２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until you hear a beep.
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitbypressing
the corresponding number on the
preset button or turning the
interface knob, and pressing ENTER
on the interface selector. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button.
When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the center
display. When you remove the disc
from the slot, the system
automatically enters the previous
modeAM,FM1,FM2,orXM
Satellite Radio. The system also
begins the load sequence so you can
load another disc. If you do not load
another disc, the load sequence is
canceled, and the system continues
playinginthepreviousmode.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Removing Discs from the
Changer
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
191
０７／０８／０６ １２：３３：０９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
center display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a disc,
press the eject button. After ejecting
the disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Error Message Cause Solution
194
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 194). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Changer Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
192
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０７／０８／０６ １２：３３：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythedisc
changer.
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
tip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-
shaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
Features
193
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０８／０６ １２：３３：２５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
maybecomestuckinsideand
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs
Damaged discs Poor quality discs
1.
2. 3.
Additional Information of
Recommended Discs
Protecting Your Discs
194
Sealed
Warped
Burrs
Chipped/
Cracked
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using Printer
Label Kit
With Plastic
Ring
０７／０８／０６ １２：３３：３６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０１９９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
This audio unit cannot play a Dual-
disc
.
4. 5.
Protecting Your Discs
Features
195
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Arrow ShapeCan Shape
０７／０８／０６ １２：３３：４７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２００
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio ReceptionAM/FM Radio Frequencies
FM/AM Radio Reception
196
０７／０８／０６ １２：３３：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FM/AM Radio Reception
Features
197
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲▼
＋
−
＋−
＋
−
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
or disc (if a disc(s) is loaded). On
models with satellite radio system,
you can also select XM1 and XM2.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.IfyoupressandholdtheCH
button ( ) or ( ), the system goes
into the skip (seek) mode. It finds a
station with a strong signal.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
each time you press the top ( ) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
( ) to return to the beginning of the
current track/file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track/file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
Remote Audio Controls
198
MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
−
＋
−
The auxiliary input jack is inside the
console compartment. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
or CD/AUX button to select it.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the skip function to select folders.
Press and hold the top ( ) of the
CH button until you hear a beep, to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
IfyouareplayingaconventionalCD
(without the text data and not
compressedinMP3orWMA),you
can use the skip function to select
discs. Press and hold the top ( ) of
the CH button until you hear a beep,
to skip forward to the next disc.
Press and hold the bottom ( ) to
skip backward to the previous disc.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
Features
199
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display (on the screen on
models with navigation system) the
nexttimeyouturnonthesystem.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
five-digit code. The code is on the
radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.
Your vehicle’s audio system may
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
You should have received a radio
code card that lists your audio
system’s code and serial numbers. It
is best to store this card in a safe
place at home. In addition, you
should write the audio system’s
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
Radio Theft Protection
200
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
button to set the time back to the
previous hour. If the displayed time
is after the half hour, the same
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
For example:
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
CONTINUED
Setting the Clock
Features
201
On models without navigation system
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
EX-L is shown.
CLOCK BUTTON
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：２８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
△
Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’
Press the selector knob to enter
your selection. The display
changes to the clock adjusting
display.
Turn the selector knob to select
the item which you want to adjust.
Turning the knob will change the
selected item between the clock
display setting, hours, minutes,
and SET. The selected item is
indicated with in the display.
You can also adjust the clock and
switch the clock display between 24-
hours and 12-hours in the menu
mode.
To adjust the clock setting:
Press and release the MENU
button. The display shows you the
menu items.
You can adjust the clock setting
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On models without navigation system
Setting the Clock
Adjusting the Clock with MENU
Button
202
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To set the time, turn the selector
knob and select the hours or the
minutes, then press the knob to
enter your selection. The display
changes to the setting display.
Turn the selector knob up or down
to count the numbers up or down.
Press the selector knob to enter
your selection. The display will
return to the clock adjusting
display.
While setting, pressing the
RETURN button will go back to
the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button again
will cancel this setting mode.
Turn the selector knob to change
the setting between 12H and 24H.
Press the selector knob to enter
your selection. The display will
return to the clock adjusting
display.
To enter the clock setting, turn
the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’
then press the knob. The display
will return to the menu item
display.
Press either the RETURN or
MENUbuttontogobacktothe
normal display.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Setting the Clock
Features
203
MINUTE SETTING
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release lever
or the emergency trunk opener.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for two
minutes, then the system resets. To
reset an alarming system before the
two minutes have elapsed, unlock
the driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
driver’s lock tab, door lock master
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
Once the security system is set,
opening either door without using
the key or the remote transmitter,
the hood, or the trunk will cause the
system to alarm. It also alarms if the
audio unit is removed from the
dashboard or the wiring is cut.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or either door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and trunk open
indicators on the instrument panel
(see page ), to see if the doors
and the trunk are fully closed. Since
it is not part of the monitor display,
manually check the hood.
61
Except LX
Security System
204
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：５６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２０９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood, the
trunk, and both doors are closed.
Push the lock button twice within 5
seconds. There should be an audible
confirmation beep.
Security System
Features
205
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：３４：５９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compassseemstobecontinually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, or the compass
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass is
self-calibrating, then the compass
display is shown in the display.
1.
2.
EX-L and all V6 without navigation
system
Compass Operation
Compass Calibration
Compass
206
COMPASS
COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS
０７／０８／０６ １２：３５：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’
Press the selector knob to enter
your selection. The display shows
you ‘‘PUSH CAL START.’’
While setting, pressing the
RETURN button will go back to
the previous display. Pressing the
MENU button will cancel the
compass setting mode.
Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compasssystemiscalibrating,the
display returns to the normal display
which you last selected.
When the calibration is successfully
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
Press the selector knob. The
compass display is blinking and
the CAL indicator is shown.
5.
6.
4.3.
Compass
Features
207
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：３５：１７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
Once the correct zone is displayed,
press the selector knob. The
display then returns to normal.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob
to enter your selection. The
display shows you the currently
selected zone number.
Find the zone for your area on the
map (see page ). If the correct
zone is not shown, turn the
selector knob to cycle the zone
lists up or down.
If necessary, press the RETURN
button to return to the previous
display. Pressing the MENU
button will cancel the compass
setting mode.
4. 5.
1.
2.
3.
209
Compass Zone Selection
Compass
208
ZONE NUMBER
０７／０８／０６ １２：３５：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compasssystemisinthezone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
Compass
Features
209
Zone Map
０７／０８／０６ １２：３５：３０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Thecruisecontrolsystemcanbe
lefton,evenwhenitisnotinuse.
1.
2.
3.Using Cruise Control
Cruise Control
210
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
０７／０８／０６ １２：３５：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel cruise control. To resume
the set speed, press the RES/
ACCEL button. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
CONTINUED
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
211
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：３５：４７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.
Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control
Cruise Control
212
０７／０８／０６ １２：３５：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
×
The HomeLink
universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
ofthewayofthedevicetoprevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
All V6 models
General Information
Important Safety Precautions
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
213
０７／０８／０６ １２：３６：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 4.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 3.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 10 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote transmitter 1 to 3
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red indicator in
HomeLink.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 1 thru 3.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 4.
2.
1.
3.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
214
RED INDICATOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：３６：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２１９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener is needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).
Test the HomeLink button by
pushing it for about 1 second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 5.
PushandholdtheHomeLink
button and watch the red indicator
on HomeLink.
If the indicator stays on, press
the HomeLink button again; the
remotely controlled device
should operate.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System.’’
1.
4.
5.
6.
CONTINUED
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
215
０７／０８／０６ １２：３６：２２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Press the HomeLink button again
for about 1 second. It should
operate the garage door.
Find the ‘‘learn’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Pressthelearnbuttononthe
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
comeonandstayon.Youthen
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
1.
4.
5.
3.
2. Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
216
LEARN BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：３６：３１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
www.homelink.com.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 2 thru 5 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
2.
214
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
217
０７／０８／０６ １２：３６：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
HFL recognizes simple voice
commands, such as phone numbers
and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
UsingVoiceControlonpage .
Bluetooth
is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to the HFL.
TheHFLusesaClass2Bluetooth,
which means the maximum range
between your phone and vehicle is
30 feet (10 meters).
To use the HFL, your phone must
have approved Bluetooth capability
along with the Hands Free Profile.
This type of phone is available
through many phone makers and
cellular carriers. You can also find an
approved phone by visiting
, or by calling
the Hands Free Link
consumer
support at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,
visit , or call (888) 9-
HONDA-9.
The Bluetooth
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
With a linked phone, the HFL allows
you to send and receive calls in your
vehicle without holding the phone.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL).
HFL uses Bluetooth
technology to
link your cellphone to your vehicle.
With HFL, you can place and receive
calls through your vehicle’s audio
system, without the distraction of
handling your cellphone. To use this
feature, you need a Bluetooth-
compatible cellphone with the Hands
Free Profile. For more information,
and a list of compatible cellphones,
visit , or call
(888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit
, or call (888) 9-HONDA-9.
The HFL is available in both English
and French (Canadian models only).
To change the language, see page
.
Here are the main features of the
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL
begin on page .
243
228
221
handsfreelink.honda.com
www.honda.ca
handsfreelink.honda.com
www.
honda.ca
On models with navigation system
Voice Control
Bluetooth
Wireless Technology
Incoming/Outgoing Calls
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
218
０７／０８／０６ １２：３６：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To operate the HFL, use the HFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The HFL buttons are used as
follows:
HFLTalk:Thisbuttonisusedbefore
you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.
The HFL microphone is on the
ceiling, between the front spotlights.
The microphone is shared with the
navigation system.
When the HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle’s front
audio system speakers. If the audio
system is in use while operating
either of the HFL buttons or making
a call, the HFL over-rides the audio
system. To change the volume level,
use the audio system volume knob,
or the steering wheel volume
controls.
You can also store the desired
number to the HFL directly from
your cellphone using the receive
contact function in the HFL.
Your vehicle’s HFL system has the
cellular phonebook import function.
This allows you to import your
cellular phonebook to the HFL.
Using the navigation system, you can
makeacalldirectlyandstorea
desired number in the HFL from the
list shown on the navigation display.
For more information on how to
import the phonebook or to make a
call, see page .
The HFL can store up to 50 names
and phone numbers in its phonebook.
Withalinkedphone,youcanthen
automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
228
CONTINUED
HFL ButtonsMicrophone
Audio System
Phonebook
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
219
HFL TALK BUTTON
HFL BACK BUTTON
０７／０８／０６ １２：３６：５９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
HFLBack:Thisbuttonisusedto
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
cancel an operation.
Press and release the button, then
wait for a beep before giving a
command.
When you are operating the HFL,
dialing or receiving calls with the
audio system in use, you will see the
above screen on the navigation
display.
You will also see ‘‘HANDS FREE
LINK’’ on the center display.
‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed on
the center display if your phone is
linked to the Bluetooth
compatible
cell phone.
Information Display
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
220
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：３７：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Here are some guidelines for using
voice control:
TheHFLisoperatedbytheHFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel. The next
few pages provide instructions for all
basic features of the HFL.
Adjust the airflow from both the
dashboard and side vents so they
do not blow against the
microphone on the ceiling.
After pressing the Talk button,
wait for the beep, then give a voice
command.
Give a voice command in a clear
natural speaking voice without
pausing between words or
numbers. If the system cannot
recognize your command because
of the background noise, speak
louder.
If the microphone picks up voices
other than yours, the system may
not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
If the HFL does not recognize a
command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
command a second time, its
response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
doesn’t recognize the command a
third time, it plays the Help
prompt.
Close the windows and the
moonroof.
To enter a command, press and
release the Talk button. Then,
after the beep, say your command
in a clear, natural tone.
Lower the A/C fan speed during
voice recognition operation.
CONTINUED
Using Voice ControlHow to Use the HFL
All phones may not
operate identically, and some
may cause inconsistent operation
of the HFL.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
221
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：３７：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
To enter a string of numbers in a
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
10, and 11.
To skip a voice prompt, press the
Talk button while the HFL is
speaking. The HFL will then begin
listening for your next command.
To go back one step in a command
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press
the Back button.
If nothing is said while the HFL is
listening for a command, the HFL
will time out and stop its voice
recognition. The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins listening from the point at
which it timed out.
To end a command sequence at
any time, press and hold the Back
button, or press and release the
Talk button, wait for the beep, and
say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins from its main menu.
When you finish a command
sequence, the HFL goes back to
its main menu. For example, when
you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the
HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been
stored.’’ The next time you press
the Talk button, you will be at the
main menu.
To hear a list of available options
at any time, press the Talk button,
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
free help.’’
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
222
０７／０８／０６ １２：３７：２４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
ThevoiceoftheHFLcanbesetto
male or female (U.S. models only).
Also, the incoming notification can
be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
notification.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
male or female prompts?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the
system voice you want. The HFL
response is, ‘‘Male (Female)
prompts have been selected.
Would you like an audible
notification of an incoming call?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
the notification to be a ring tone or
prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after the
beep, the HFL returns to its main
menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no
ring tone or prompt playback
during an incoming call. The audio
system will still mute, and a
message will be displayed.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or
‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘A
ring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘An
incoming call prompt will be used.’’
If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will
hear a ring tone through the audio
speakers to announce an incoming
call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
will hear this message to
announce an incoming call: ‘‘You
have an incoming call.’’
The HFL response continues ‘‘A
security option is available to lock
the HFL system. Each time the
vehicle is turned on, a passcode
would be required to use this
system. Would you like this
security option turned on?’’ If you
say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set your
passcode. Refer to the setting
procedure in the next column.
4.
5.3.
2.
1.
6.
To set up the system, do this:
CONTINUED
Setting Up the System
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
223
０７／０８／０６ １２：３７：３３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The HFL will accept a numeric, four-
digit passcode that you can use for
security purposes.
Follow the system setup
procedure as described previously.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
four-digit number you would like
to set as your passcode?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
passcode you want to use. For
example,say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFL
responseis‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthis
correct?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘Security will not
be used. The system setup is
complete.’’
Once a passcode is set, you can lock
the HFL so it only operates after the
passcode is entered.
The HFL will prompt you for your
passcode each time the ignition
switch is turned to the ON (II)
position and you press the Talk
button. You will only be asked for
thepasscodeonceperignition
cycle. If the passcode is set, its
response is ‘‘The system is locked.
What is the four-digit passcode?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say your four-digit
passcode.Forexample,say‘‘1,2,3,
4.’’
If the passcode is correct, the HFL
response is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If the
passcode is not correct, the HFL
responseis‘‘1,2,3,4isincorrect.
Pleasetryagain.’’Gobacktothe
step 2.
If you forget your passcode and you
cannot activate the HFL, consult
your dealer to cancel the passcode.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Security is on.
Each time the vehicle is turned on,
the passcode will be required to
use the system. The system setup
is complete. Returning to the main
menu.’’
1.
4.
5.
6.2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
To set your passcode, do this:
To enter your passcode, do this;
Setting Your Passcode
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
224
０７／０８／０６ １２：３７：４４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２２９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your Bluetooth compatible phone
with Hands Free Profile must be
paired to the HFL before you can
make and receive hands-free calls.
To confirm that your phone is
Bluetooth
compatible, visit
, or call (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-
HONDA-9. Your phone retailer
should also be able to confirm that
your phone is Bluetooth
compatible.
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair
your phone to the HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
operating manual, visit
,callthe
Hands Free Link
consumer
support at (888) 528-7876, or call
your phone retailer. In Canada,
call (888) 9-HONDA-9.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
For pairing, your phone must be in
its Discovery mode.
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones
before pairing a new phone.
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Phone setup options
are status, pair, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The pairing
process requires operation of your
mobile phone. For safety, only
perform this function while the
vehicle is stopped. State a four-
digit code for pairing. Note this
code. It will be requested by the
phone.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
code you want to use. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFLresponse
is,‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthiscorrect?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘HFL is now
searching for a Bluetooth phone.
Make sure the phone you are
trying to pair is in discovery mode.’’
Steps 5 and 6 show a
common way to get your phone into
its Discovery mode. If these steps do
not work on your phone, refer to the
phone’s operating manual.
3.
1.
2.
4.
handsfreelink.honda.com
handsfreelink.honda.com
CONTINUED
Pairing Your Phone
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
225
NOTE:
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：３７：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Which phone
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to rename.
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
new name for Eric’s phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to delete. For
example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
to delete Eric’s phone?’’
If you want to pair another phone,
repeat steps 1 through 7.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to use. For example, say
‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
successfully paired. Returning to
the main menu.’’
When asked by the phone, enter
the four-digit code from step 3 into
your phone. The HFL response is
‘‘A new phone has been found.
What would you like to name this
phone?’’
Follow the prompts on your phone
togetitintoitsDiscoverymode.
The phone will search for the HFL.
When it comes up, select
HandsFreeLink from the list of
options displayed on your phone.
2.
1. 1.
2.6.
7.
8.
3.
4.
3.
5.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
226
０７／０８／０６ １２：３８：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
deleted.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all
phones paired to the system have
been read, the HFL response is
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An
example of the HFL response is,
‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
strength is three bars. Signal
strength is five bars, and the
phone is roaming. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
for the next phone.’’ The HFL
then disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone. If the HFL finds it, an
example of the HFL response is,
‘‘Paul’s phone is linked.’’ If no
other phones are found, the first
phone remains linked.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
delete Eric’s phone. Say OK to
continue, otherwise, say Go back,
or Cancel.’’
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
4.
5.
To list all paired phones, do this:
To find out the status of the phone being
used, do this:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone, do this:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
227
０７／０８／０６ １２：３８：１４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can make calls using any phone
number, or by using a name in the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial
the last number called. During a call,
theHFLallowsyoutotalkupto30
minutes after you remove the key
from the ignition switch. Continuing
a call without running the engine
may discharge and weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to call. For example, say
‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or
continue to add numbers.’’
You can also make a call directly
from the list shown on the
navigation display.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the
steering wheel volume controls.
To end the call, press the Back
button.
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
1.
2.
4.
3.
To make a call using a phone number,
do this:
Making a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
228
０７／０８／０６ １２：３８：２２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＃
To make a call using a name in the HFL
phonebook, do this:
To send a number during a call, do this:
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to call. For example, say
‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
To end the call, press the Back
button.
The HFL allows you to send
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system. You can also
program account numbers into the
HFL phonebook for easy retrieval
during menu-driven calls.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3.’’TheHFLresponseis
‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to
add numbers.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the
steering wheel volume controls.
To redial the last number called by
the phone, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the steering
wheel volume controls.
To send a pound ( ), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
4.
CONTINUED
Sending Numbers or Names
During a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
229
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：３８：３１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to send. For example, say
‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Would you like to
send account number?’’
If you receive a call when you are not
on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
audio system (if it is on), and plays
the incoming call notification, if
activated. To answer the call, press
the Talk button and begin speaking.
If you don’t want to answer the call,
press the Back button.
If your phone has Call Waiting, and
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the
Talk button to answer it. When you
do this, the original call is placed on
hold. To return to the original call,
press the Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the new call,
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.
During a call, you can transfer it
from the HFL to your phone, or from
your phone to the HFL.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from the HFL to the
phone.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from your phone to
the HFL.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dial
tones will be sent, and the call will
continue.
2.
1.
3.
3.
To send a name during a call, do this: To transfer a call from the HFL to your
phone, do this:
To transfer a call from your phone to the
HFL, do this:
Receiving a Call Transferring a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
230
０７／０８／０６ １２：３８：４２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
During a call, you can mute or
unmute your voice to the person you
are talking to.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is
canceled.’’
The HFL phonebook can store up to
50 names with their associated
numbers. These can be any types of
numbers. For example, you can store
a phone number and use it to make a
call, or you can store an account
number and use it during a call to a
menu-driven phone system.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to store?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
number for account number?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
7891. Say enter, or continue to add
numbers.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account
number) has been stored.
Returning to the main menu.’’
1.
2.
4.
5.
3.
1.
2.
To mute your voice, do this:
To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:
CONTINUED
Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
231
０７／０８／０６ １２：３８：５３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To edit the number of a name, do this:
To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do
this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to edit. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘What is the new number for
Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The number has
been changed. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new
number for Eric. For example, say
‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘987 654 3219. Say enter, or
continue to add numbers.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to delete. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, receive
contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook in the
order which they were stored.
When the end of the list is
reached, the HFL response is,
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
2.
1.
3.
4.
2.
1.
2.
3.
1.
4.5.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
232
０７／０８／０６ １２：３９：０５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To call a name from the phonebook list,
do this:
handsfreelink.
honda.com
To store a phone number from your
phone:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When it
saysthenameyouwanttocall,for
example, Eric, press the Talk
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
to call Eric?’’
You can store the desired number to
the HFL phonebook directly from
your cellular phone.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once
connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob, or the steering
wheel volume controls.
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit
, or call the Hands Free
Link
consumer support at (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-
HONDA-9. You can see your phone’s
owner’s manual for information.
With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,
edit, delete, receive contact and
list.’’
2.
1.
3.
1.
CONTINUED
Storing a Phone Number Directly
from Your Phone
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
233
０７／０８／０６ １２：３９：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you want to continue to store
any other numbers, press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘HFL is now waiting
to receive a contact from a
Bluetooth device.’’
Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number? To discard
this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ the HFL
response is, ‘‘Neil at work has
been stored. Would you like HFL
to receive another contact?’’ Go to
step 6.
If you say ‘‘No,’’ the HFL response
is ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Neil at work will be
stored.Isthiscorrect?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Receive
contact.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘The receive process requires
operation of your Bluetooth device.
For safety, only perform this
function while the vehicle is
stopped. HFL is now waiting to
receive a contact from a Bluetooth
device.’’
Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number? To discard
this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’
5.
4. 6.
7.
2.
3.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
234
０７／０８／０６ １２：３９：２１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２３９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To use the cellular phonebook with
the HFL, say or select ‘‘Cellular
Phonebook’’ from the Information
screen. The navigation display will
change as shown above.
If any phonebook is not stored and
your phone is not linked to the HFL,
Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.
The cellular phonebook option
allows you to store up to 1,000 names
and 10,000 phone numbers in the
phonebook of Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink from your cellular
phonebook. The maximum names
and numbers to be stored varies on
the data size. With the HFL, you can
then automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Susan at work will be
stored.Isthiscorrect?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susan
at work has been stored. Would
you like HFL to receive another
contact?’’
If you do not want to continue to
store any other numbers, press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Returning to the main
menu.’’
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit
, or call the Hands Free
Link
consumer support at (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-
HONDA-9. You can see your phone’s
owner’s manual for information.
8.
9.
10.
handsfreelink.
honda.com
CONTINUED
Cellular Phonebook Options
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
235
０７／０８／０６ １２：３９：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To import the cellular phonebook
You can import the phonebook of
your cellular phone in the HFL. Link
your phone to the HFL and select
‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ from
the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. When
the message ‘‘The import was
successful.’’ is displayed, push in on
the Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’
Search Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to search the
phone numbers stored in the HFL.
When you enter keyword for a
person’s name, such as the first
name or last name, the system will
find the number you want and let
you make calls.
Delete Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL. When you
link your phone to the HFL and
select this option, the system will
automatically delete the phonebook
of the linked phone from the HFL
(see page ).
PIN Number. This option allows you
to add, change, or remove a PIN
number for any phonebook that has
been imported.
Import Cellular Phonebook: This
option allows you to store the
phonebook of your cellular phone in
the HFL. When you link your phone
to the HFL and select this option, the
system will start importing and
loading the phonebook.
239
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
236
Example
０７／０８／０６ １２：３９：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Enter the PIN number to access the
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.
You can search the stored number
by entering keywords to make calls
by using the HFL.
Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
For information on linking to the
HFL, see page .225
To search the imported phonebook
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
237
NOTE:
PIN ICON
IMPORTED DATEIMPORTED
PHONEBOOK
０７／０８／０６ １２：３９：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−Select the number (1 6) of the
desired person from the list.
Up to three category icons are
displayed in the right side of the list.
These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the
person. If a name has more than
threecategoryicons,‘‘ ’’is
displayed.
The following category icons will
appear:
Enter the keyword for a person’s
name, such as the first name or last
name, using the Interface Dial. If the
system does not find an exact match,
say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finish
entering the keyword.
The system will display a list of
person’s names, with the closest
match to the name you entered at
the top of the list.
…
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
238
Home
Mobile
Preference
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
０７／０８／０６ １２：３９：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To delete the imported phonebookTo store in the Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
You can delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL.
Link your phone to the HFL and
select ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.
After selecting a person, the system
will display a list of the person’s
phone numbers.
Select the desired number from the
list to make a call.
Select the desired number from the
list to store it in the HFL.
Say or select ‘‘STORE IN
HandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select a
number to call’’ screen. The screen
shown above will appear.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
239
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：０５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To add, change, or remove a PIN
number from any phonebook
You can add, change or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.
Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the
‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. The
display will change as shown above.
After you enter the correct PIN
number, or if the phonebook you
select is not PIN protected, the
following screen appears.
Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message
‘‘The imported phonebook has been
deleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
complete the deletion.
Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Enter the PIN number to access the
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
240
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To change a PIN numberTo add a PIN number
Select the phonebook that you
wish to change the PIN number
for. The display will change as
shown above.
Enter the 4-digit PIN number. You
will be asked to re-enter the PIN to
verify.
Select the phonebook you wish to
add the PIN number to. The
phonebook you select cannot
already have a PIN icon. The
display will change as shown
above.
2. 1.1.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
241
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：２１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This operation clears the HFL of
your passcode, your paired phones,
all names in the HFL phonebook,
and all imported phonebooks.
Clearing is recommended before you
sell your vehicle.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘This process
will clear all paired phones, clear
all entries in the phonebook, clear
the passcode, and restore the
defaults in the system setup. Is
this what you would like to do?’’
Enteryournew4-digitPIN
number. You will be asked to re-
enter the PIN to verify.
Enter your current PIN number. 3.
1.
2.2.
To clear the system, do this:
Clearing the System
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
242
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’
If there are no paired phones
without French name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Venillez
attendre que le systeme change de
langue. Please wait while the
language is changed.’’ ‘‘La langue
a ete changee. Retour au menu
principal.’’
If there are paired phones
without French name tags, the
following prompts will continue.
If there are paired phones without
French name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘Pour que le système
identifie les téléphones qui ont été
jumelés dans une autre langue, les
noms des téléphones doivent être ré-
enregistrés.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Change
language.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘English or French?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez
selectionne Français. Les noms
enregistres en mode Anglais ne
seront pas accessible en mode
Français. Voulez-vous continuer?
You have selected French. Name
tags that were stored while in
English mode will not be
accessible in French mode. Would
you like to continue? ’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
clear all paired phones, all
phonebook entries, the passcode,
and restore the defaults in the
system setup. Say OK to proceed,
otherwise say go back or cancel.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to
proceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or
‘‘Cancel.’’
If you said ‘‘OK,’’ the HFL
response is, ‘‘Please wait while the
system is cleared.’’ This may take
up to 2 minutes to complete, then
the HFL response is, ‘‘The system
has been cleared. Returning to the
main menu.’’
1.
2.
3.
5.
3.
4.
Canadian models only
To change from English to French, do
this:
CONTINUED
Changing Language
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
243
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＜＞
＜
＞
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’
If there are no paired phones
without English name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Please wait
while the language is changed.
Venillez attendre que le systeme
change de langue.’’ ‘‘The language
has been changed. Returning to
the main menu.’’
If there are paired phones
without English name tags, the
following prompts will continue.
If there are paired phones without
English name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘The language has
been changed. For the system to
identify phones that were paired
while in another language, the
phone names need to be re-
recorded.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘You have
selected English. Name tags that
were stored while in French mode
will not be accessible in English
mode. Would you like to continue?
Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Les
noms enregistres en mode
Français ne seront pas accessible
en mode Anglais. Voulez-vous
contnuez?’’
The HFL response is, for example,
‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour
Paul’s phone ?’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le
nom Français pour Pat’s
phone ?’’ Press and release the
Talk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de
Pat.’’ After all paired phones
missing a French name tag are re-
recorded, the HFL will prompt,
‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’
4.
1.
2.
3.
To change from French to English, do
this:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
244
NOTE:
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２４９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＜＞
＜
＞
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What
is the English name for
Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘What is the
English name for Téléphone de
Pat ?’’ Press and release the Talk
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
phone.’’ After all paired phones
missing an English name tag are
re-recorded, the HFL will say
‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
4.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
245
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
246
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：５２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 248
.................Fuel Recommendation . 248
.........Service Station Procedures . 249
....................................Refueling . 249
........Check Fuel Cap Message . 251
Opening and Closing
................................the Hood . 252
...................................Oil Check . 254
.............Engine Coolant Check . 255
...............................Fuel Economy . 256
...Accessories and Modifications . 259
.............................Carrying Cargo . 261
Before Driving
Before Driving
247
０７／０８／０６ １２：４０：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５２
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
You may hear a knocking noise from
the engine if you drive the vehicle at
low engine speed (below about 1,000
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
raise the engine speed by shifting to
a lower gear.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
On models with manual transmission
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
248
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：０５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
To open the fuel fill door, push
down on the lever located to the
left of the driver’s seat.
1.
2.
Refueling
Quick Start Guide
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
249
Push
TETHER
HOLDER
FUEL FILL CAP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display. If the system still detects
an evaporative system leak after
retightening the cap, the
malfunction indicator lamp may
come on (see page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
5.
6.
3. 4.
362
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Service Station Procedures
250
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：２０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
362
Service Station Procedures
Check Fuel Cap Message
Before Driving
251
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Reach in between the hood and
the front grille with your fingers.
The hood latch handle is above
the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle up
until it releases the hood. Lift the
hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
1. 2.
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedures
252
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：３２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole pointed
by an arrow in the hood.
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
uptherestofthewayandholdit
up.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
To close the hood, lower it to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then press down firmly
with your hands. Make sure the
hood is securely latched.
3.
V6 models2.4 engine models
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
253
V6 models2.4 engine models
CLIP
GRIP SUPPORT ROD
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.Remove the dipstick (orange
handle/loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
1.
2.
3.
4.
306
Oil Check
Adding Engine Oil
Service Station Procedures
254
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
2.4
engine modelsV6 models2.4 engine models
DIPSTICK
(orange handle)
DIPSTICK (orange loop)
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：４７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２５９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
310
302
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
255
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MIN
V6 models2.4
engine models
RESERVE TANK
V6 models
MAX
MIN
MAX RESERVE TANK
０７／０８／０６ １２：４１：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
pergallon(basedonEPAfuelcost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada: Visit
)
Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shownintheexampletotheright
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
www.
fueleconomy.gov www.
vehicles.gc.ca
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
City MPG
Combined Fuel Economy
Highway MPG
256
Combined Fuel
Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
City MPG Highway MPG
０７／０８／０６ １２：４２：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
aremoreefficientwhenwarmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see
on page ).
For example:
Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
An under-inflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
302
CONTINUED
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
).
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Drive moderately
Observe the speed limit
Always drive in the highest gear
possible
Avoid excessive idling
Maintain proper tire inflation
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean
307
Vehicle Maintenance
Drive Eff iciently
Before Driving
257
０７／０８／０６ １２：４２：１８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Reset trip counter to zero.
Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
Follow one of the simple calculations above.
The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Fuel Economy
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system
Plan and combine trips
Calculating Fuel Economy
258
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Kilometers
L per 100 km
Liter
０７／０８／０６ １２：４２：２７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
theseareasmayinterferewith
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
364
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
259
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４２：３６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Some examples are:
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
260
０７／０８／０６ １２：４２：４４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Center pockets
Console compartment
Trunk, including the rear seat
when folded down
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
261
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT CENTER POCKETS
GLOVE BOX
SEAT-BACK POCKETSTRUNK
DOOR POCKET
０７／０８／０６ １２：４２：５２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−×
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg).
Label Example
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
262
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：０３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
areonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
263
Max Load (850 lbs) Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：１０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or the proper operation of
the sensors under the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Also, keep all cargo below the
bottom of the windows. If it is
higher, it could interfere with the
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .51
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo
264
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：１８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２６９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your dealer
for further information.
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
Optional
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Net
Before Driving
265
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
266
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system, the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 268
.......................Starting the Engine . 269
...................Manual Transmission . 270
..............Automatic Transmission . 273
...........................................Parking . 278
.............................Braking System . 279
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 280
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
........................................System . 282
Tire Pressure Monitoring
........................System (TPMS) . 284
...........................Towing a Trailer . 287
Driving
Driving
267
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７２
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
2.
1.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.
4.
5.
10.
11.
92
93
102
76
14
55
On vehicles with power adjustable
seats
On vehicles with manual adjustable
seats
Preparing to Drive
268
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：４２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
1.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
Starting the Engine
Driving
269
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from thef t. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page .
78
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：５２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse.
On vehicles with 6-speed manual
transmission, the lockout system
prevents you from shifting directly
from any forward gear to reverse
while the vehicle is moving at a
certain speed (see page ).
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
272
On models with 5-speed manual
transmission, or models
with 6-speed manual transmission
Manual Transmission
270
5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T
０７／０８／０６ １２：４３：５９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (25 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (65 km/h)
50 mph (80 km/h)
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
17 mph (27 km/h)
27 mph (43 km/h)
36 mph (58 km/h)
41 mph (66 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
On models with 5-speed manual
transmission
On models with 6-speed manual
transmission
Recommended Shift Points
Manual Transmission
Driving
271
Rapid slowing or speeding up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４４：０５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
reverse.
With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
If you are still unable to shift to
reverse, apply the parking brake,
and turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
The manual transmission has
lockout so you cannot accidentally
shift from any forward gear to
reverse while the vehicle is moving
at a certain speed. If you cannot shift
to reverse when the vehicle is
stopped, do the following.
With the clutch pedal pressed,
move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-speed manual transmission only
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout
Manual Transmission
272
Move the shift lever in sequence.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４４：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from Park to any position,
pressfirmlyonthebrakepedal,and
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever, then move the
lever. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
CONTINUED
ShiftingShift Lever Position Indicators
Automatic Transmission
Driving
273
RELEASE BUTTON
SHIFT LEVER
０７／０８／０６ １２：４４：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−−
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestop,andthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
276
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
D3 to 2
2to1
1to2
2toD3
D3 to D
DtoN
DtoD3
NtoD
RtoN
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Neutral (N)
Park (P) Reverse (R)
274
０７／０８／０６ １２：４４：３０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２７９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
−To shift to second,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
This position is
similar to D, except only the first
three gears are selected. Use D3
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,
or to provide engine braking when
going down a steep hill. D3 can also
keep the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
front of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
operate this transmission much like
a manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
Second (2)Drive (D)
Drive (D3)
First (1)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
275
０７／０８／０６ １２：４４：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Use a small
flat-tipped screwdriver or metal
fingernail file to carefully pry up
the edge of the cover and remove
it from the slot.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Set the parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter
Automatic Transmission
276
COVER
０７／０８／０６ １２：４４：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the right side. Press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
front of the shift lever and move
the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
6.
5.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
277
RELEASE BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
０７／０８／０６ １２：４４：５０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Parking Tips
Parking
278
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness
and reduces brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake pad wear
indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Braking System
Driving
279
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page .
363
You should never pump the brake pedal.
ABS Indicator
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
280
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：１４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
363
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
281
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：２１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
283
VSA Activation Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
282
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：３１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
341
VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
Driving
283
VSA OFF SWITCH
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：３９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
349
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
284
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２８９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page ).
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
283
336
335
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
285
０７／０８／０６ １２：４５：５６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Each wheel (except the compact
sparetirewheel)isequippedwitha
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
thecompactsparetire,thelowtire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
349
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
286
０７／０８／０６ １２：４６：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy
can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10% of the total
trailer weight. Too much tongue
load reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page ).248
CONTINUED
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
Towing a Trailer
Break-In Period
Driving
287
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４６：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60% of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40% toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is:
EX and EX-L:
EX and EX-L:
LX and LX-S:
LX and LX-S:
V6 models with manual transmission:
V6 models with automatic
transmission:
V6 models with manual transmission:
V6 models with automatic
transmission:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Canadian models
U.S. models
Towing a Trailer
288
4,299 lbs (1,950 kg)
4,409 lbs (2,000 kg)
2,020 kg
1,970 kg
4,541 lbs (2,060 kg)
2,075 kg
4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)
2,040 kg
０７／０８／０６ １２：４６：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The maximum allowable weight at
the vehicle axles is:
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
EX and EX-L:
EX and EX-L:
LX and LX-S:
V6 models with automatic
transmission:
V6 models with manual transmission:
LX and LX-S:
V6 models with automatic
transmission:
V6 models with manual transmission:
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Canadian models
U.S. models
Towing a Trailer
Driving
289
2,006 lbs (910 kg)
2,337 lbs (1,060 kg)
2,414 lbs (1,095 kg)
2,039 lbs (925 kg)
1,065 kg
910 kg
1,095 kg
930 kg
950 kg
1,160 kg
2,050 lbs (930 kg)
2,535 lbs (1,150 kg)
2,050 lbs (930 kg)
2,425 lbs (1,100 kg)
1,110 kg
950 kg
０７／０８／０６ １２：４６：３０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or
more be equipped with its own
electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and maintained, and that it
meets federal, state, province, and
local regulations.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
If you cannot get to a public scale,
you can estimate the total trailer
weight by adding the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the
manufacturer) with everything in or
on the trailer.
If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Towing a Trailer
Safety Chains
Trailer Brakes
Hitches
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Checking Loads
290
０７／０８／０６ １２：４６：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension and
the cooling system are in good
operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check with
your local trailer sales or rental
agencies for the requirements in the
area where you plan to tow, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
Seeyourtrailerdealerorrental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
CONTINUED
Pre-Tow Checklist
Additional Towing Equipment
Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
291
０７／０８／０６ １２：４６：５０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use D position when
towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘ ’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving on Hills
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing a Trailer
292
０７／０８／０６ １２：４６：５９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page .
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in first or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
371
bottom
Towing Your Vehicle
Backing Up
Parking
Handling Crosswinds and Buf feting
Towing a Trailer
Driving
293
０７／０８／０６ １２：４７：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
294
０７／０８／０６ １２：４７：１０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０２９９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 296
....................Maintenance Minder . 297
..............................Fluid Locations . 304
........................Adding Engine Oil . 306
Changing the Engine Oil and
...........................................Filter . 308
..............................Engine Coolant . 310
....................Windshield Washers . 312
.......................Transmission Fluid . 313
..........Automatic Transmission . 313
..............Manual Transmission . 315
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 318
....................Power Steering Fluid . 319
....................................Timing Belt . 320
.............................................Lights . 321
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 330
.....................................Floor Mats . 330
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 331
.................................Wiper Blades . 332
...............................................Tires . 335
...................Checking the Battery . 343
.............................Vehicle Storage . 344
395
Maintenance
Maintenance
295
０７／０８／０６ １２：４７：１５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３００
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or qualified
mechanic.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
296
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４７：２５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
The remaining engine oil life is
shownonthedisplayaccordingto
this table:
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then press and release
the select/reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page ).
Based on the engine operating
conditions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
64
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance
297
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０７／０８／０６ １２：４７：３３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicators remind you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
Maintenance Minder
298
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
０７／０８／０６ １２：４７：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
Whentheengineoillifeis15to1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
303
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
299
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
０７／０８／０６ １２：４７：５０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
indicator is displayed.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the select/reset knob.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described as follows.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
1.
2.303
Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
300
MAINTENANCE
MINDER INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
Press the select/reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
4.3.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
301
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
254
255
313
318
335
321
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
302
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：１８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＃
＃
−
−＃
＊
Maintenance Minder
303
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
(V6 engine only)
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
:
A
B
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
Symbol
1
1
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the center
column on page .
NOTE:
1:
302
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under 20°F,
29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada).
Maintenance Minder
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：２５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Fluid Locations
2.4 engine models
304
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３０９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Fluid Locations
V6 models
Maintenance
305
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
０７／０８／０６ １７：５７：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
306
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
2.4
engine models
V6 models
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
307
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：４６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.
3.2.
1.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
308
OIL DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
2.4
engine models V6 models
０７／０８／０６ １２：４８：５３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
V6 models
2.4
engine models
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
309
OIL FILTER
OIL FILTER
2.4
engine models V6 models
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４９：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
2.4 engine models only
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
310
RESERVE TANK
RESERVE TANK
V6 models2.4
engine models
If you regularly drive your vehicle
under severe conditions in very low
temperature (under 31°F, 35°C), a
higher concentration of coolant should
be used. Consult your Honda dealer
f or more information of the proper
coolant.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４９：１１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushingitdownandturningit
counterclockwise.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
311
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP
V6 models2.4 engine models
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４９：２０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).60
On Canadian models:
Windshield Washers
312
LEVEL GAUGELEVEL GAUGE
2.4
engine models V6 models
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
０７／０８／０６ １２：４９：２８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
1.
2. 3.
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
313
DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK
2.4
engine models2.4 engine models V6 models
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
０７／０８／０６ １２：４９：３６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the maintenance minder (see page
).
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
5.
4.
6.
297
Transmission Fluid
314
V6 models
LOWER
MARK
UPPER
MARK
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
not mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
０７／０８／０６ １７：５７：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３１９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground.
Reinstall the under cover and put the
holding clips back in place. Make
sure the under cover is installed
under the edge of the front bumper.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the maintenance minder (see page
).
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Remove the transmission filler bolt,
and carefully feel inside the bolt hole
with your finger.
The fluid level should be up to the
edge of the bolt hole. If it is not, add
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF) until it starts to run out of the
hole. Reinstall the filler bolt, and
tighten it securely.
To check the transmission fluid level,
remove the under cover holding clips
with a flat-tip screwdriver, then
remove the under cover carefully.
297
2.4 engine models
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission
Maintenance
315
Correct level
FILLER BOLT
０７／０８／０６ １２：４９：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground.
To check the transmission fluid level,
remove the 3 under cover holding
clips with a flat-tip screwdriver, then
pull out the driver’s side under cover
carefully.
Remove the check bolt and look for
transmission fluid coming out of the
bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall
the check bolt.
If no fluid comes out, remove the
filler bolt. Slowly add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the check bolt
hole.
V6 models
Transmission Fluid
316
FILLER BOLT
WASHER
CHECK BOLTDRAIN BOLT
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：０２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pour the fluid into the filler hole
slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the maintenance minder (see page
).
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Let the fluid run out until it stops,
then reinstall the check bolt and the
filler bolt.
Reinstall the under cover and put the
holding clips back in place. Make
sure the under cover is installed
under the edge of the front bumper. 297
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
317
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly. There are up to
two reservoirs, depending on the
model. They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
Replace the brake fluid according to
the maintenance minder (see page
).
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
297
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Brake Fluid
318
MAX
MIN
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
Manual transmission only
Power Steering FluidClutch Fluid
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Maintenance
319
MAX
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
MIN
2.4
engine models
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
The timing belt should be replaced
according to the maintenance
minder (see page ).
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
(Canada) if you regularly drive your
vehicle in any of the following
conditions:
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spills immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
If you frequently tow a trailer.
297
V6 models
Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
320
UPPER LEVEL
V6 models LOWER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：３１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be done by your dealer or
other qualified technician.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Open the hood.
To change a bulb on the
passenger’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its stay.
1.
CONTINUED
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
High Beam Headlight
Maintenance
321
2.4 engine models
STAY
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
To change a bulb on the driver’s side,
undo the fastener and remove the air
intake cover and duct.
3.
2.
On V6 models
Lights
322
FASTENER
AIR INTAKE COVER
BULB
TAB
DUCT
V6 models
STAY
V6 models
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：４６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Reinstall the engine coolant
reserve tank.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Reinstall the air intake cover and
duct securely. Reinstall the
fastener and secure it by pushing
on the head until it locks.
6.
5.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
7.
4.
CONTINUED
Passenger’s side
Driver’s side on V6 models
Low Beam Headlight
Lights
Maintenance
323
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
TAB
０７／０８／０６ １２：５０：５８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Open the hood.
To change the turn signal bulb on
the passenger’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its stay.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
To remove the burned out bulb,
push it in and turn it
counterclockwise until it unlocks.
1. 2.
8.
7.
6.
9.
3.
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Parking Light Bulb
324
BULB
V6 model is shown.
STAY
０７／０８／０６ １２：５１：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３２９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Install the new bulb and turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.
To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
6.
1.
7.
5.
4.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Passenger’s side
Lights
Replacing a Front Side Marker
Light Bulb
Maintenance
325
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
０７／０８／０６ １２：５１：１７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clips,
andlocktheminplacebypushing
on their centers.
Open the trunk.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
Remove the screws in the center
of each of the two fasteners on the
side of the trunk lining. Pull the
lining back.
Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,
back-up light or turn signal light.
5.
6.
7.
2.
1.
4.
3.
5.
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
326
SCREW
SOCKET
BULB
０７／０８／０６ １２：５１：２７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Push the trunk lid trim back into
position.
Open the trunk, and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks. Make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the fasteners into the holes on
the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screws.
2.
1.
3.6.
7.
8.
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Maintenance
327
SOCKET
BULB
０７／０８／０６ １２：５１：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If equipped
Passenger’s side
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Thefoglightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustment should
be done by your dealer or other
qualified technician.
Remove the three fasteners with a
flat-tip screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
1. 2.
3.
ReplacingaFogLightBulb
Lights
328
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
TAB
FASTENERS
Halogen light bulbs get very hot when
lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on
the glass can cause the bulb to overheat
and shatter.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５１：４４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To change the bulb, start the
engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the right, then turn off
the engine.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Reinstall the under cover and put
the three fasteners back in place.
Reinstall the inner fender. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the front bumper.
Reinstall the holding clips, and
push in its head of each clip.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
6.
7.
8.
4.
5.
9.
10.
11.
Passenger’s side
Driver’s side
Driver’s side
Lights
Maintenance
329
HOLDING CLIPS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
TAB
０７／０８／０６ １２：５１：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
The driver’s and right rear
passenger’s floor mats that came
with your vehicle hook over the floor
mat anchors. This keeps the floor
mats from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
(driver’s floor mat) or with the seat
weight sensors (right rear floor mat).
Dirt build-up around the openings of
the seat belt anchors can cause the
belts to retract slowly. Wipe the
openings with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
330
FRONT (Driver’s side)
OPENING
０７／０８／０６ １２：５２：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
canbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mat.
Have your dealer replace this filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the airflow
from the heating and cooling
system/climate control system
becomeslessthanusual.
Dust and Pollen Filter
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
331
REAR (Right passenger’s side)
０７／０８／０６ １２：５２：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To replace a wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Put a cloth on the edge of the lock
tab, then push up on the lock tab
carefully with a flat-tip screwdriver.
2.
1.
Wiper Blades
332
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５２：１４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pivot the blade assembly toward
the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Make sure the two rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
333
WIPER ARM BLADE
TOP
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
０７／０８／０６ １２：５２：２２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Push down
thelocktab.Makesurethewiper
blade assembly locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
until the tabs are fitted onto the
wiper blade.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
334
TOP
０７／０８／０６ １７：５７：３８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３３９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehiclerideharshly,aremore
prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Thetirepressuremonitoringsystem
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page for
more information.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on the next page.
284
CONTINUED
Inflation Guidelines
Tires
Maintenance
335
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５２：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings.Thisisnormal.Donotlet
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
The following charts show the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
380
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
V6 models
2.4
engine models
Recommended Tire Pressures
Tires
Normal Driving
336
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
P235/45R18 94V
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
P225/50R17 93V
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
０７／０８／０６ １２：５２：４８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressuresasshownbelow.Ifyoudo
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.
Tire pressure for high speed driving
is the same as for normal driving.
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
V6 models only
V6 models only
2.4
engine models
Tire Inspection
Tires
High Speed Driving
Maintenance
337
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
P235/45R18 94V 35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See
on page ).382
Tires
Tire MaintenanceTire Service Life
Tire
Labeling
338
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display.
Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time
they are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-to-
back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
Tire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
339
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
FrontFront
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
notworkonthattire.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
340
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size information.
Tires
V6 models:
V6 models:
Wheels
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain
CH2612T
2.4
engine models:
2.4
engine models:
380
382
CONTINUED
Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving
Snow Tires
Tire Chains
Tires
Maintenance
341
18x81/2J
P235/45R18 94V
17x71/2J
P225/50R17 93V
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：３０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
Wheels
Tires
342
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified mechanic.
The location of the test indicator
window varies between
manufacturers.
CONTINUED
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
Maintenance
343
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
2.4
engine models V6 models
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：４３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting may be lost. To reset the time,
see page .
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradio,youwill
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
).
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
201
200
On vehicles with navigation system
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
Vehicle Storage
344
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：５１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３４９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
345
０７／０８／０６ １２：５３：５８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
346
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 348
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 349
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 354
................................Jump Starting . 356
..............If the Engine Overheats . 359
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 361
..........Charging System Indicator . 361
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 362
...............Brake System Indicator . 363
..............................................Fuses . 364
..............................Fuse Locations . 368
......................Emergency Towing . 371
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
347
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：０４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５２
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Follow these precautions:
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire. After several
miles (kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low
tire pressure indicator goes off.
Compact Spare Tire
348
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：１３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.Park the vehicle on firm, level and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
The tools are in the trunk. Open
the trunk and raise the trunk floor
by pulling up the strap.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
349
JACK
SPARE TIRE
TOOL KITTRUNK FLOOR
STRAP
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：２１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Take the jack out of the tool kit
case.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Placethejackunderthejacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
6.
7.
8.
Changing a Flat Tire
350
JACKING POINT
JACK WHEEL NUT
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：２７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
9. 11.
10.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
351
WHEEL WRENCH EXTENSION
BRAKE HUB
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：３４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
15.
12.
13.
14.
Changing a Flat Tire
352
CENTER CAP
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：４１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
To remove the spacer cone, squeeze
the tabs on the wing bolt to
disengage it from the center of the
spacer cone, then pull the bolt
downward.
To install the wing bolt to the spacer
cone, reverse this procedure.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the jack and tools in the tool
kit case. Place the tool kit case in
the flat tire.
Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
(see
page ).
Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
Store the center cap in the trunk.
Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
16.
17.
19.
18.
20.
21.
22.
286
Changing a Flat Tire
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Taking Care of the Unexpected
353
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
SPACER CONE
TAB
Loose items can fly around the
interiorinacrashandcould
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５４：５２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified mechanic to
determine the problem (see
on page ).
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery connections (see page ).
You can then try jump starting the
vehicle from a booster battery (see
page ).
356
371
343
356
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
354
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３５９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
269
78
364
371
IftheEngineWon’tStart
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
355
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：０７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
To jump start your vehicle:
Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in neutral (manual)
or Park (automatic), and set the
parking brake.
You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
1.
2.
Jump Starting
356
2.4 engine models
BOOSTER BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：１５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
＋
−
CONTINUED
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the engine mounting
bolt (automatic) or the
transmission mounting bolt
(manual),asshown.Donot
connect this jumper cable to any
other part of the engine.
3. 4.
2.4 engine models
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
357
V6 models
BOOSTER BATTERY
2.4
engine models with automatic
transmission
2.4
engine models with manual
transmission
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：２２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.Connect the second jumper cable to
thenegative( )terminalonthe
booster battery. Connect the other
end to the engine hanger as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to
any other part of the engine.
7.
6.
5.
V6 models
Jump Starting
358
V6 models
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：２９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
2.
1.
3.
4.
5.
371
CONTINUED
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
359
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
10.
371
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency
Towing
360
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
1.
2.
3.
4.
254
306
371
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Emergency Towing
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
361
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５５：５４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the malfunction
indicator lamp may also come on
with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
thesecodesmaybeerased.Itcan
take several days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it takes several days of
normal driving.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to for
more information (see page ).389
Readiness Codes Emissions Testing
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
362
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and the engine. Those repairs
may not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５６：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
318
371
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
363
U.S. Canada
０７／０８／０６ １２：５６：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
threefuseboxes.
Thedriver’ssideinteriorfuseboxis
under the dashboard on the driver’s
side. The fuse label is attached to the
side panel.
The passenger’s side interior fuse
box is on the lower passenger’s side
panel. To remove the fuse box lid,
put your finger in the notch on the
lid, and pull it upward slightly, then
pull it toward you and take it out of
its hinges.
The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
Fuses
364
INTERIOR (Driver’s side)
FUSE BOX FUSE LABEL
TAB
NOTCH
INTERIOR (Passenger’s side) UNDER-HOOD
０７／０８／０６ １２：５６：１５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３６９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Also check the combined fuse box in
the under-hood fuse box.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
, and , or the diagram on
thefuseboxlidorthefuselabel,
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check if the device works.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
On the under-hood and passenger’s
side interior fuse boxes, remove
the cover from each fuse box.
3.
1.
2.
368 369 370
CONTINUED
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
365
FUSE
BLOWN
BLOWN
０７／０８／０６ １２：５６：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has spare fuses on the
back of the under-hood fuse box
cover.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each one with the fuse
pullerprovidedonthebackofthe
under-hood fuse box cover.
5.4.
Fuses
366
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
SPARE FUSES
FUSE PULLER
０７／０８／０６ １２：５６：３０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system may disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code
(see page ).
6.
200
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
367
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５６：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
−
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
No. Circuits Protected
No.Circuits ProtectedAmps.No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Amps.
37
38
26
32
33
34
35
36
21
22
23
24
25
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
20
21
Driver’s Side Fuse Box
IG Main
Rear Defroster
Sub Fan Motor
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Heater Motor
Hazard
Horn, Stop
Not Used
Not Used
IG Coil
FI Sub
Back Up
Interior Lights
FI Main
DBW
Not Used
Back Up, FI ECU
MG Clutch
Fan Relay
Battery
Battery
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
Not Used
ABS/VSA
ABS/VSA Motor
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
Not Used
100 A
120 A
40 A
40 A
30 A
(40 A)
1
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
(60 A)
30 A
Not Used
Not Used
Sub Fan Motor
Wiper Motor
Main Fan Motor
Driver’s Side Light Main
Driver’s Side Fuse Box
Passenger’s Side Light Main
(40 A)
50 A
40 A
20 A
40 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
2.4
engine models
V6 models
1:
2:
1
2
1
2
1
2
31
31
1
2
Fuse Locations
368
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
０７／０８／０６ １７：５７：４６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
＊
No. Circuits ProtectedNo.
No.
Amps.
Amps. Circuits Protected
Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fuel Pump
VB SOL
SRS
ODS (Occupant Detection
System)
Not Used
ACM
Daytime Running Lights
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
If equipped
20 A
(10 A)
10 A
7.5 A
(10 A)
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
15 A
20 A
10 A
(10 A)
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
A/C
Accessory, Key, Lock
Accessory
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Moonroof
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
(Not Used)
Front Accessory Power Socket
Driver’s Power Window
Driver’s Side Door Lock
Left Front Fog Light
Left Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Left Headlight High Beam
TPMS
Left Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
(7.5 A)
Not Used
Not Used
Washer
Wiper
Meter
ABS/VSA
ACG
STS
:
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
369
INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Driver’s Side)
０７／０８／０６ １７：５７：５５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−−
＊
No.
No. Circuits ProtectedAmps.
Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo.Amps. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
If equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Lumbar Support
Seat Heater
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
(10 A)
(15 A)
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Right Front Fog Light
Right Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
Interior Lights
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Right Side Door Lock
Not Used
Rear Accessory Power
Socket
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Not Used
Premium AMP
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
10 A
10 A
(10 A)
10 A
7.5 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
10 A
(20 A)
15 A
20 A
(20 A)
:
Fuse Locations
370
INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Passenger’s Side)
０７／０８／０６ １２：５７：０２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below35mph(55km/h).
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground.
Start the engine.
Turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Shift to D position for 5 seconds,
then to N.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
CONTINUED
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
Emergency Towing
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
371
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels off the ground.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５７：１６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Emergency Towing
372
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
０７／０８／０６ １２：５７：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 374
Specifications
...............(2.4
engine models) . 376
Specifications
...............................(V6 models) . 378
DOT Tire Quality Grading
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 380
.................................Tire Labeling . 382
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
............................Explanation . 384
.......................Emissions Controls . 386
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 388
........................Emissions Testing . 389
Technical Information
Technical Information
373
０７／０８／０６ １２：５７：２３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７８
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
374
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
０７／０８／０６ １２：５７：２８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３７９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The engine number is stamped on
the front of the engine block.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
375
ENGINE NUMBER
2.4
engine models
V6 models
ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
０７／０８／０６ １７：５８：０１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications (2.4 engine models)
376
Dimensions Seating Capacities
Capacities
Weights
Air Conditioning
Engine
107.9 in (2,740 mm)
62.2 in (1,580 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
190.9 in (4,849 mm)
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
6.9 US qt (6.5 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
2.1 US qt (2.0 )
2.0 US qt (1.9 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0
)
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
2.11 US gal (8.0 )
2.14 US gal (8.1 )
1.56 US gal (5.9 )
1.59 US gal (6.0 )
5
2
3
Total
Front
Rear
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Manual trans-
mission fluid
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
18.5 US gal (70.0 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)
ND-OIL8
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs (U.S.)
Spark plugs (Canada)
Water cooled 4-stroke
DOHC i-VTEC 4-cylinder
gasoline engine
3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
10.5 : 1
ILZKR7B11S
SXU22HCR11S
DILZKR7A11GS
ILZKR7B11S
SXU22HCR11S
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )
Approx.
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
1:
2:
NGK:
DENSO:
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S.
Canada
Front/Rear
ULEV
PZEV NGK:
NGK:
DENSO:
72.7 in (1,848 mm)
56.3 in (1,432 mm)
1
2
０７／０８／０６ １２：５７：５３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
Specifications (2.4 engine models)
Technical Information
377
FusesLights
Battery
Tires
Alignment
12 V 60 W (HB3)
12 V 55 W (H11)
12 V 24/2.2 CP
21 W
12 V 16 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 21/5 W
12 V 5 W
12 V
Interior
Under-hood
P225/50R17 93V
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking lights
Front side marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
Stop/taillights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light
Vanity mirror lights 12 V 1.1 W
Capacity 12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
36 AH/5 HR
38 AH/5 HR
45 AH/20 HR
47 AH/20 HR
52 AH/5 HR
65 AH/20 HR
See page 369 or the fuse label
attached on the side panel.
See page 370 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door.
See page 368 or the fuse box
cover.
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Size
Pressure
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°
3°48’
T135/80D16 101M
High
Low
: PZEV engine model
Passenger’s side
Driver’s side
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
(Amber)
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
０７／０８／０６ １２：５８：１７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications (V6 models)
378
Dimensions Seating Capacities
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
Engine
107.9 in (2,740 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
190.9 in (4,849 mm)
62.2 in (1,580 mm)
Total
Front
Rear
5
2
3
1.74 US gal (6.6 )
2.27 US gal (8.6 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)
ND-OIL8
18.5 US gal (70.0 )
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Manual
transmission
fluid
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
7.9 US qt (7.5 )
3.5 US qt (3.3 )
2.2 US qt (2.1 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC i-VTEC (SOHC VTEC )
6-cylinder (V6) gasoline engine
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression
ratio
Spark plugs (U.S.)
Spark plugs (Canada)
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.5 : 1
10.0 : 1
ILZKR7B11
SXU22HCR11
DILZKR7A11G
ILZKR7B11
SXU22HCR11
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )
Approx.
1:
2:
Change
Total
ULEV
PZEV
Front/Rear
NGK:
DENSO:
NGK:
NGK:
DENSO:
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S.
Canada
72.7 in (1,848 mm)
56.3 in (1,432 mm)
Automatic
Manual
Manual transmission:
1
2
０７／０８／０６ １７：５７：３２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
If equipped
Specifications (V6 models)
Technical Information
379
Fuses
Tires
Alignment
Battery
Lights
12 V 60 W (HB3)
12 V 55 W (H11)
12 V 24/2.2 CP
5W12 V
12 V 55 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 16 W
Interior
Under-hood
Size
Pressure
P235/45R18 94V
T135/80D16 101M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°
3°48’
See page 369 or the fuse label
attached on the side panel.
See page 370 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door.
See page 368 or the fuse box
cover.
Capacity
12 V
12 V
60 AH/5 HR
72 AH/20 HR
12 V 1.1 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 5 W
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking lights
Front side marker lights
Fog lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
Stop/taillights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light
Vanity mirror lights
21/5 W12 V
High
Low
:
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
(H11)
(Amber)
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction
380
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature
Technical Information
381
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：１２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８６
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
P
R
V
DOT
B97R
235
45
18
94
Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Size
382
(3)
(4)
Tire Labeling Example
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
P235/45R18 94V
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
FW6X
2202
Max Press
Max Load
Tire Labeling
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Technical Information
383
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：３４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
384
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：４０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３８９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Information
385
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９０
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons.
Controlling the production of NOx,
CO, and HC is important to the
environment. Under certain
conditions of sunlight and climate,
NOx and HC react to form
photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
monoxide does not contribute to
smog creation, but it is a poisonous
gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
386
０７／０８／０６ １２：５９：５４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９１
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The exhaust emissions controls
includethreeorfoursystems:
PGM-FI, ignition timing control,
exhaust gas recirculation (V6
models), and three way catalytic
converter. These three or four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
2
2
V6 models
Exhaust Emissions Controls
Replacement Parts
Emissions Controls
Three Way Catalytic Converter
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Technical Information
387
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：０３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９２
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
388
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
2.4
engine models V6 models
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：１１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９３
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic) or neutral (manual).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm,andholditthereuntilthe
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(about3minutes).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CONTINUED
Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
Technical Information
389
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：１９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９４
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do
notusethecruisecontrol.When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
7. 8.
9.
Emissions Testing
390
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：２４ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９５
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
....Customer Service Information . 392
....................Warranty Coverages . 393
Reporting Safety Defects
...........................(U.S. vehicles) . 394
.....................Authorized Manuals . 395
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
391
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：２７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９６
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle identification number (see
page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
374
Customer Service Information
392
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Customer Relations
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：３５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９７
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2008 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2008 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
393
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：４５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９８
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
394
http://www.saf ercar.gov
http://www.saf ercar.gov
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：４９ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０３９９
2008 Accord Coupe
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
(U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
395
Form Description
2008 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4
Service Manual Base Book
2008 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6
Service Manual Supplement
2008 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2008 Honda 2/4 door Body Repair Manual
2008 Honda Accord 2-door Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda Accord
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda Accord Honda Service History
2008 Honda Accord 2-door Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Publication
Form Number
61TA000
61TA001
61TA000EL
61TA030
31TE0600
31TA5800
31TA5M00
31TE0Q00
HON-R
www. helminc. com
０７／０８／０６ １３：００：５８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４００
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
396
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：００ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０１
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
CONTINUED
....................................Accessories . 259
ACCESSORY
...............(Ignition Key Position) . 79
............Accessory Power Sockets . 114
..................Active Head Restraints . 98
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 307
...........................Advanced Airbags . 25
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21
..........Airbag System Components . 21
......Air Conditioning System . 122, 127
.................................Usage . 125, 128
...............Air Pressure, Tires . 335, 336
......................................Antifreeze . 310
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 58, 280
...................................Operation . 280
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 200
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 79
................................Audio System . 135
.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 81
...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 72
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19
.............Automatic Speed Control . 210
..............Automatic Transmission . 273
..................Capacity, Fluid . 376, 378
.......................................Shifting . 273
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 273
................Shift Lever Positions . 274
....................Shift Lock Release . 276
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 199
...................Capacities Chart . 376, 378
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 56, 361
............................Jump Starting . 356
..............................Maintenance . 343
....................Specifications . 377, 379
..............................Before Driving . 247
....................................Belts,Seat .8,17
.........................Beverage Holders . 112
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 218
..................................Booster Seats . 48
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 280
.............Break-in, New Linings . 248
....................Bulb Replacement . 326
...........................................Fluid . 318
.......................................Parking . 110
.................System Indicator . 57, 363
........................Wear Indicators . 279
.............................Braking System . 279
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 248
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 73
........................Brights, Headlights . 70
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 326
..............................Brake Lights . 326
.................................Fog Lights . 328
................Front Parking Lights . 324
.................................Headlights . 321
.........High-mount Brake Light . 327
................................Rear Lights . 326
....................Specifications . 377, 379
............Turn Signal Lights . 324, 326
......................Bulbs, Halogen . 321, 328
Index
A
B
C
INDEX
I
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：０６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０２
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 54
..........Daytime Running Lights . 60, 72
Daytime Running Lights
.......................................Indicator . 60
.................................Dead Battery . 356
.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 394
................Defogger, Rear Window . 75
......Defrosting the Windows . 126, 131
............................Dimensions . 376, 378
...............Dimming the Headlights . 70
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 313
..................................Engine Oil . 254
..........................Directional Signals . 70
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 279
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 309
Doors
..........................Auto Door Lock . 81
.......................Auto Door Unlock . 84
..............Locking and Unlocking . 80
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 380
Downshifting, Manual
.............................Transmission . 270
.............................Carrying Cargo . 261
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
.........................................CD Care . 193
..........................CD Changer . 150, 181
........................Certification Label . 374
............................................Chains . 341
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 349
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 308
......................................When to . 297
...Charging System Indicator . 56, 361
............Check Fuel Cap Message . 251
............Checklist, Before Driving . 268
.....................................Child Safety . 33
..............................Booster Seats . 48
.............................Child Seats . 40, 41
Important Safety
..........................Reminders . 33-50
..........................................Infants . 38
..........................Larger Children . 47
.........................................LATCH . 42
......................Risks with Airbags . 34
.............................Small Children . 39
..........................................Tether . 46
...........................Warning Labels . 52
..........Where Should a Child Sit . 34
.......................................Child Seats . 33
.........................................LATCH . 42
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 330
...............Climate Control System . 127
..............................................Clock . 201
...................................Clutch Fluid . 319
..................CO in the Exhaust . 51, 386
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 269
..............................Compact Spare . 348
.........................................Compass . 206
.................Console Compartment . 113
.................Consumer Information . 392
.............Controls, Instruments and . 53
Coolant
........................................Adding . 310
....................................Checking . 255
.........................Proper Solution . 310
...................Temperature Gauge . 65
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 386
................Cruise Control Indicator . 62
............Cruise Control Operation . 210
.............Customer Service Office . 392
Index
D
II
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：１０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０３
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
CONTINUED
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 267
....................................Economy . 256
..........Dual Temperature Control . 132
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 331
..............................Economy, Fuel . 256
..................................Emergencies . 347
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 356
...........Brake System Indicator . 363
................Changing a Flat Tire . 349
.....Charging System Indicator . 361
.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 74
............................Jump Starting . 356
..................Checking the Fuses . 364
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 361
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 362
..................Overheated Engine . 359
.......................................Towing . 371
.........................Emergency Brake . 110
......................Emergency Flashers . 74
......................Emergency Towing . 371
............Emergency Trunk Opener . 91
.......................Emissions Controls . 386
........................Emissions Testing . 389
Engine
............Adding Engine Coolant . 310
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 65
.........................If It Won’t Start . 354
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 362
.......................Oil Life Indicator . 297
..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 361
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 306
...............................Overheating . 359
....................Specifications . 376, 378
....................Speed Limiter . 272, 276
.......................................Starting . 269
..........Engine Speed Limiter . 272, 276
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 248
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 386
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 51
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 15
..........................Fan, Interior . 123, 130
.........................................Features . 121
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 249
Filters
........................Dust and Pollen . 331
...............................................Oil . 308
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 349
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 313
..........................................Brake . 318
.........................................Clutch . 319
..............Manual Transmission . 315
..........................Power Steering . 319
..................Windshield Washer . 312
........................................Fog Lights . 73
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 99
..........................Four-way Flashers . 74
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 23
.................................................Fuel . 248
........Check Fuel Cap Message . 251
......................Fill Door and Cap . 249
...........................................Gauge . 65
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60
................Octane Requirement . 248
...............................Oxygenated . 248
........................Tank, Refueling . 249
Index
INDEX
E
F
III
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：１５ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０４
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
......Gas Mileage, Improving . 256, 257
.........................................Gasoline . 248
...........................................Gauge . 65
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60
................Octane Requirement . 248
........................Tank, Refueling . 249
................Gas Station Procedures . 249
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 65
...............................................Fuel . 65
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 273
..............Manual Transmission . 270
......................................Glove Box . 112
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.............................(GVWR) . 263, 288
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 374
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 77
...........................................Switch . 79
............Timing Control System . 387
........................Immobilizer System . 78
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 321
...........................HandsFreeLink
. 218
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74
........................................Headlights . 70
........................................Aiming . 321
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 72
..............Automatic Lighting On . 71
............Daytime Running Lights . 72
..................High Beam Indicator . 60
.........................Reminder Chime . 70
Replacing Halogen
..............................Bulbs . 321, 328
...................................Turning on . 70
........................Head Restraints . 13, 96
.....................Heating and Cooling . 122
.............................Heated Mirrors . 103
...................................Heater, Seat . 101
HomeLink
Universal
................................Transceiver . 213
........Hood, Opening and Closing . 252
..............................................Horn .4,68
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 319
...............................Fuel Economy . 256
....Fuel Economy (ECO) Indicator . 59
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 364
Index
G
HI
IV
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：２０ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０５
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
CONTINUED
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 350
.......................................Jack, Tire . 350
................................Jump Starting . 356
..................................................Keys . 77
.......................Label, Certification . 374
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 70
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 18
...............................LATCH System . 42
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 321
.......................................Indicator . 55
.........................................Parking . 70
............................Turn Signal . 58, 70
....................................Load Limits . 262
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 79
.........................................Indicators . 56
...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 58
Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 57, 363
................Charging System . 56, 361
.............................Cruise Control . 62
.................................Cruise Main . 62
................Door and Trunk Open . 61
DRL (Daytime Running
......................................Lights) . 60
...................................Fog Lights . 62
Fuel Economy (ECO)
...................................Indicator . 59
...................................High Beam . 60
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 58
.....................................Lights On . 60
......................................Low Fuel . 60
................Low Oil Pressure . 56, 361
......................Low Tire Pressure . 59
..................Maintenance Minder . 61
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 362
..........................Security System . 61
...........................Side Airbag Off . 57
.......................................Seat Belt . 56
...............................................SRS . 57
...........................................TPMS . 59
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 58
............................VSA Activation . 62
.................................VSA System . 62
..............................Washer Level . 60
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 56
...............................Infant Restraint . 38
......................................Infant Seats . 38
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 335
........................Information Display . 64
.................................Inside Mirror . 102
.............................Inspection, Tire . 337
....................Installing a Child Seat . 41
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 42
............................Instrument Panel . 55
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 73
..............Instruments and Controls . 53
...............................Interior Lights . 117
........................................Introduction . i
Index
INDEX
J
K
L
V
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：２６ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０６
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 79
............................Fuel Fill Door . 249
..................................Glove Box . 112
....................Lockout Prevention . 81
.................................Power Door . 80
...........................................Trunk . 90
........................Low Coolant Level . 255
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 60
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 270
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 56, 361
................................Lower Anchors . 42
Lubricant Specifications
..................................Chart . 376, 378
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 261
...................Neutral Gear Position . 274
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 248
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 271
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 374
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 248
.........................................Odometer . 64
Oil
........................Change, How to . 308
......................Change, When to . 297
......................Checking Engine . 254
..............Pressure Indicator . 56, 361
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 307
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 79
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 386
............................Outside Mirrors . 102
....Outside Temperature Indicator . 66
....................Overheating, Engine . 359
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 302
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 248
..............Panel Brightness Control . 73
........................Park Gear Position . 274
...........................................Parking . 278
...............................Parking Brake . 110
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 57, 363
.................................Parking Lights . 70
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 388
....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 30
.............................PGM-FI System . 387
...................................Pollen Filter . 331
..........................Power Door Locks . 80
................Power Seat Adjustments . 92
..................................Maintenance . 295
........................................Minder . 297
Main Items and Sub
..............................Items . 300, 303
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 302
.........................Minder Indicator . 61
..........................................Safety . 296
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 362
...................Manual Transmission . 270
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 315
.........................Meters, Gauges . 55, 63
....................Methanol in Gasoline .248
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 102
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 260
.......................................Moonroof . 108
Index
N
O
M
P
VI
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：３２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０７
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
......Power Socket Locations . 111, 114
............................Power Windows . 104
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 15
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 16
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15
........................Protecting Children . 33
.....................General Guidelines . 33
.......................Protecting Infants . 38
.......Protecting Larger Children . 47
.........Protecting Small Children . 39
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 42
...................Radiator Overheating . 359
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 135
.................Radio Theft Protection . 200
...........................Readiness Codes . 389
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 326
............................Rear Seat Access . 94
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 99
..........................Rear View Mirror . 102
.................Rear Window Defogger . 75
.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 92, 93
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 271
........................................Refueling . 249
.......................Reminder Indicators . 56
.......................Remote Transmitter . 87
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 308
..........................................Fuses . 364
................................Light Bulbs . 321
....................................Schedule . 297
................................Timing Belt . 320
...........................................Tires . 340
.............................Wiper Blades . 332
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 20
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 255, 310
...............................Restraint, Child . 33
..................Reverse Gear Position . 274
...........................Reverse Lockout . 272
................................Rotation, Tire . 339
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 17
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 394
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 52
..............................Safety Messages . iii
...............Satellite Radio, XM . 144, 174
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18
...............Additional Information . 17
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
.....................................Cleaning . 330
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 18
................................Maintenance . 19
Reminder Indicator and
................................Beeper . 17, 56
...................System Components . 17
...............Use During Pregnancy . 15
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 18
Seats
.................................Adjusting . 92-94
.........................................Folding . 99
.......................................Heaters . 101
............................Security System . 204
.........................Select/Reset Knob . 63
Index
INDEX
R
S
VII
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：３７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０８
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 347
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 380
.....Emissions Control Systems . 386
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 388
.......................Temperature Gauge . 65
....................Temperature, Outside . 66
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46
................Theft Protection, Radio . 200
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 388
..........................Time, Setting the . 201
....................................Timing Belt . 320
....................................Tire Chains . 341
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40
...Selector Knob (Disc Changer) . 136
...............................Serial Number . 374
..............................Service Minder . 297
...........................Service Manual . 395
.........Service Station Procedures . 249
..........................Setting the Clock . 201
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 273
........................Shift Lock Release . 276
................................Side Airbags . 9, 27
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 28
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 28
...............................Signaling Turns . 70
.....................................Snow Tires . 341
................................Sound System . 135
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 348
....................Specifications . 377, 379
............................Spark Plugs . 376, 378
........................Specifications . 376, 378
................................Speed Control . 210
........................Speed Limiter . 272, 276
...................................Speedometer . 63
..........SRS, Additional Information . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
.............................Airbag Service . 31
......Airbag System Components . 21
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 30
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 57
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 79
.......................Starting the Engine . 269
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 269
................With a Dead Battery . 356
........Steam Coming from Engine . 359
Steering Wheel
................................Adjustments . 76
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 79
.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 198, 210
...................Stereo Sound System . 135
........................................Sun Visor . 115
........................Sunglasses Holder . 115
Supplemental Restraint
..................................System .9,21
......................................Servicing . 31
.........................SRS Indicator . 29, 57
...................System Components . 21
..................................Synthetic Oil . 307
Index
T
VIII
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：４２ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４０９
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Unexpected, Taking Care of
...............................................the . 347
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 380
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 248
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 309
................................Vanity Mirror . 115
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 262
.............Vehicle Dimensions . 376, 378
....Vehicle Identification Number . 374
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 282
...VSA Activation Indicator . 62, 282
.........................VSA Off Switch . 283
........VSA System Indicator . 62, 282
.............................Vehicle Storage . 344
.............................Ventilation . 124, 130
.................................................VIN . 374
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 307
...........Voice Control System . 128, 161
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 52
....................Warranty Coverages . 393
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 349
...........................Tire Information . 382
.................................Tire Labeling . 382
Tire Pressure Monitoring
............System (TPMS) . 284, 384
Low Tire Pressure
...........................Indicator . 59, 284
Required Federal
............................Explanation . 384
..................TPMS Indicator . 59, 285
...............................................Tires . 335
..............................Air Pressure . 336
........................................Chains . 341
.........................Checking Wear . 337
..........................Compact Spare . 348
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 380
......................................Inflation . 335
..................................Inspection . 337
...................................Replacing . 340
......................................Rotating . 339
................................Service Life . 338
...........................................Snow . 341
....................Specifications . 377, 379
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 349
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 287
................Emergency Wrecker . 371
.............................Weight Limit . 287
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 313
Checking Fluid Level,
...........................Manual . 315, 316
..........Fluid Selection . 314, 315, 317
..............Identification Number . 375
.............Shifting the Automatic . 273
..................Shifting the Manual . 270
.....................................Treadwear . 337
.......................................Trip Meter . 65
................................................Trunk . 90
....................Emergency Opener . 91
.................................Opening the . 90
............................Open Indicator . 61
....................................Turn Signals . 70
CONTINUED
Index
INDEX
U
V
W
IX
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：４７ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４１０
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
＊Washers, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 312
.......................................Indicator . 60
.....................................Operation . 69
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 76
............Alignment and Balance . 338
..........................Compact Spare . 348
..............................Wrench, Nut . 350
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 105
................Operating the Power . 104
...........................Rear, Defogger . 75
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 69
...........................Defroster . 126, 131
.......................................Washers . 69
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 332
.....................................Operation . 69
....................................Worn Tires . 337
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 371
................XM Satellite Radio . 144, 174
U.S. only
Index
X
:
X
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：５１ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４１１
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
０７／０８／０６ １３：０１：５３ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４１２
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):Manual Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
SpareTirePressure:
2.4 engine models
V6 models
2.4
engine models
V6 models
5-speed manual transmission:
6-speed manual transmission:
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) (see page
).
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
18.5 US gal (70.0
)
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
2.0 US qt (1.9
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
2.2 US qt (2.1
)
306
314
315
320
318
０７／０８／０６ １３：０２：０８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０４１３
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
This owner’s manual should be considered a
permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of the
Accord Coupe. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33TE0C00
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
０７／０８／０６ １２：０６：２８ ３１ＴＥ０６００ ０００１
2008 Accord Coupe
Main Menu
